6DR2100-5 - Siemens - Datasheet.Live

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 1

SIPART DR21

6DR 210*--*

Edition 08/2010

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 3

Classification of safety--related notices

This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well

as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual

by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:

!DANGER

indicates an immenently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in

death or serious inury.

!Warnung

indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

death or serious injury.

!CAUTION

used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,

if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTION

used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.

NOTICE

indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable

result or state.

.NOTE

highlights important information on the product, using the product, or part of the

documentation that is of particular importance and that will be of benefit to the

user.

The reproduction, transmission or use of this docu-

ment or its contents is not permitted without ex-

press written authority. Offenders will be liable for

damages. All rights, including rights created by pa-

tent grant or registration of a utility model or design,

are reserved.

Siemens AG

Bereich Automatisierungs-- und Antriebstechnik

Geschäftsgebiet Prozessinstrumentierung-- und

Analytik

D--76181 Karlsruhe

Disclaimer of Liability

We have checked the contents of this manual for

agreement with the hardware and software descri-

bed. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely,

we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the

data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any

necessary corrections included in subsequent edi-

tions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.

eSiemens AG 1999

Technical data subject to change.

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Trademarks

SIMATICR,SIPARTR,SIRECR, SITRANSRregistered trademarks of Siemens AG.

Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trade-

marks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

Controls and displays

1 Analog indication of actual value x

2 Analog indication of setpoint w

3 w/x digital display (other values can be displayed)

4 Signalling lamp w -- lights up if w is displayed

5 Signalling lamp x -- lights up if x is displayed

6 Selector pushbutton for w/x digital display,

acknowledgement pushbutton for flashing following return

of power or pushbutton for entering selection mode

7 Pushbutton for adjustment of manipulated variable --

closed (open)

8 Pushbutton for adjustment of manipulated variable --

open (closed)

9 y digital display

10 Signalling lamps of Δy digital outputs with S controller

11 Switchover pushbutton Manual/Automatic or “Enter” pushbutton

from selection mode of configuring mode

12 Signalling lamp for manual mode

13 Signalling lamp for y--external mode

Modification of setpoint 14 Pushbutton for falling setpoint

15 Pushbutton for rising setpoint

16 Selector pushbutton for internal/external setpoint or “”Exit’”

pushbutton from configuring and selection modes to process

operation mode

17 Signalling lamp for internal setpoint

18 Signalling lamp for computer switched off (with wext)

Further messages 19 Signalling lamp for adaptation procedure running

20 Signalling lamp for “Limit triggered”

.Note Operation can be blocked using the digital signal bLb;

exception: switching over o w/x digital display.

Display of actual value

and setpoint

Modification of

manipulated variable

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 5

Block diagram

AI4A

S13

AI3A

S11

AI1A

AI3

Slot 1

Slot 2

I,U,R

AI4

Options

S18

DI1

DI2

24 V

L+

GND

+24 V

+5 V

UREF

S14

S21

S57 DO7

DO8

24 V

S56

S22

S20

S19

wEA/x3

S17

S16

S15

4DO 24V

2DI

2DO Rel

5DI

Slot 3

S84toS91

4/2

4/7

4/8

4/3

Slot 4

SES

DO2

DO1

+Δy

--Δy

AO/Jy

IOptions

Txd

Rxd

1/4

1/3

1/2

1/1

2/4

2/3

2/2

2/1

3/6

3/5

3/4

3/3

3/2

3/1

∽

AI1

AI2

UNI

S8 to S10

S12

AI2A

249

Basic

settings

S1 to S3

Analog inputs

S4 to S21

Configuration of slot 3

S22

Digital inputs

S23toS41

Setpoint tracking

S42toS45

Control algorithm

S46toS48

Y switchover

S49toS53

Y indicator S54toS55

Analog output S56

Switching output S57

Digital outputs

S58toS75

Limit monitors

S76toS80

x/w indicator S81

Restart

conditions

S82toS83

Serial interface

S84toS91

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Manual Contents

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 7

Contents

page

1 General Part -- Fundamental control technology terms 9....................

2 Technical Description 17...................................................

2.1 Safety notes and scope of delivery 17..................................................

2.2 Range of Application 18..............................................................

2.3 Features 19........................................................................

2.4 Design 24..........................................................................

2.5 Function principle 26................................................................

2.5.1 Standard controller 26.................................................................

2.5.2 Option module 28....................................................................

2.6 Technical Data 34...................................................................

2.6.1 General data 34......................................................................

2.6.2 Standard controller 36.................................................................

2.6.3 Option module 40....................................................................

3 Functional description of the structure switches 47..........................

3.1 General 47.........................................................................

3.2 Analog input signal processing (S3 to S21) 47..........................................

3.3 Digital input signal processing (S23 to S41) 50..........................................

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45) 55...................................................

3.4.1 General, recurrent functions 55.........................................................

3.4.2 Fixed setpoint controller with 2 independent setpoints (S1 = 0) 59............................

3.4.3 Slave controller, synchronized controller, SPC-controller 62.................................

3.4.4 DDC-Fixed setpoint controller (S1 = 2) 68................................................

3.4.5 Controlled ratio controller (S1 = 3) 75....................................................

3.4.6 Control unit/process display (S1 = 4) 80..................................................

3.4.7 Fixed setpoint controller with one setpoint (control system coupling) 89.......................

3.4.8 Slave controller without Int/Ext -switching (control system coupling) 90........................

3.5 Control algorithm 91.................................................................

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55) 94.........................................

3.7 Analog output signal processing (S56) 110...............................................

3.8 Digital output signal processing (S57 to S75) 111.........................................

3.9 Adaptation (S48) 113.................................................................

3.10 Other functions of the standard controller 115............................................

3.10.1 Adaptive filter 115.....................................................................

3.10.2 Response threshold AH 116............................................................

3.10.3 Limit value alarm (S76 to S80) 117.......................................................

3.10.4 Linearizer (S21, oFPA) 118.............................................................

3.10.5 Restart conditions (S82, S83) 120........................................................

3.10.6 Serial interface and PROFIBUS-DP (S84 to S91) 120.......................................

4 Installation 121.............................................................

4.1 Mechanical Installation 121............................................................

4.1.1 Work prior to installation 121............................................................

4.1.2 Installing the controller 124..............................................................

4.1.3 Installation of the options modules 125....................................................

4.2 Electrical Connection 126.............................................................

4.2.1 Warnings and block diagram 126.........................................................

4.2.2 Connection standard controller 130.......................................................

4.2.3 Connection of the options modules 133...................................................

4.2.3.1 Modules for analog measuring inputs 133.................................................

4.2.3.2 Connection examples for analog measuring inputs with the module 6DR2800-8J 137.............

4.2.3.3 Modules for expanding the digital inputs and digital outputs 142...............................

4.2.4 Connection of the interface module 6DR2803-8C 144.......................................

4.2.4.1 RS 232 point-to-point (END/END) 144....................................................

4.2.4.2 RS 485 bus 145.......................................................................

4.2.4.3 PROFIBUS-DP, 6DR2803-8P 146........................................................

ManualContents

8SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

5 Operation 149..............................................................

5.1 General 149.........................................................................

5.2 Process operation mode 150..........................................................

5.3 Selection mode 152..................................................................

5.4 Configuration modes 154..............................................................

5.4.1 General, Online and Offline modes 154...................................................

5.4.2 Configuration mode online-parameters onPA 155..........................................

5.4.3 Configuration mode adaptation AdAP 156................................................

5.4.4 Configuration level offline parameters oFPA 163...........................................

5.4.5 Configuration mode structure switch StrS 165.............................................

5.4.6 Set UNI-module CAE3 173............................................................

5.4.6.1 Measuring range for mV (S8 = 0) 175.....................................................

5.4.6.2 Measuring range for U, I (S8 = 0) 175.....................................................

5.4.6.3 Measuring range for thermocouple with internal reference point (S8 = 1) 175....................

5.4.6.4 Measuring range for thermocouple with external reference point (S8 = 2) 176....................

5.4.6.5 Measuring range for PT100 four-wire and three-wire connection (S8 = 3,4) 176..................

5.4.6.6 Measuring range for PT100 two-wire connection (S8 = 5) 177.................................

5.4.6.7 Measuring range for resistance potentiometer (S8 = 6, 7) 177.................................

5.4.7 APSt (All Preset) Reset to factory setting 178..............................................

5.5 CPU self-diagnostics 179..............................................................

6 Commissioning 181........................................................

6.1 Adapting the direction of control action to the controlled system 181.........................

6.2 Setting of actuating time in K-controllers (S2 = 0) 183......................................

6.3 Adaptation of the S-controller to the actuating drive 183....................................

6.4 Setting the filter and the response threshold 185..........................................

6.5 Automatic setting of control parameters by the adaptation method 186.......................

6.6 Manual setting of the control parameters without knowledge of the plant behavior 189..........

6.7 Manual setting of the control parameters after the transient function 191......................

7 Application examples for configuring the controller 193.......................

7.1 General 193.........................................................................

7.2 Working with different setpoints 195.....................................................

7.3 Configuration examples 199...........................................................

7.4 Configuring tool, forms 216............................................................

8 Maintenance 223...........................................................

8.1 General information and handling 223...................................................

8.2 Exchanging components 224..........................................................

8.3 LED-test and software version 226......................................................

8.4 Spare parts list 227...................................................................

8.5 Ordering data 228....................................................................

9 General explanation of abbreviations for SIPART DR 229......................

Index 235........................................................................

1HL1Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 9

1 General Part -- Fundamental control technology terms

DControl loop

The function of a closed-loop control is to bring the output variable x of a controlled system

to a predefined value and to retain this value even under the influence of disturbance

variables z. The controlled variable x is compared with the command variable w. The

resulting system deviation xd = w -- x is processed in the controller to the manipulated

variable y which acts on the controlled system.

The controlled variable x is measured cyclically in a digital control.

w Command variable

x Controlled variable

xd System deviation

y Manipulated variable

z Disturbance variable

1 Controlled system

2 Control equipment

z1 z2 z3

Figure 1-1 Function diagram of control loop

DSensors and transmitters

The controlled variable can be any physical variable. Frequently controlled variables in pro-

cess engineering are pressure, temperature, level and flow.

In most process engineering applications, the process variables are measured using sensors

and transmitters with a standardized signal output (0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA). The standard-

ized signal can be connected to several process process devices (loop between e.g. re-

corder/indicator/controller). Temperature sensors such as resistance thermometers or ther-

mocouples, as well as resistance transmitters, can be connected directly to the controller

using appropriate input cards (options).

DFinal control elements and actuators

In process engineering applications, the manipulated variale y primarily acts on the con-

trolled system via a valve, a butterfly valve or another mechanical means of adjustment.

Three types of drive are possible for actuating such final control elements:

- Pneumatic actuators with compressed air as the auxiliary energy and electropneumatic

signal converters or electropneumatic positioners. These have a proportional action and

are driven by continuous controllers.

- Electric actuators, consisting of an electric motor and gear unit. These have an integral

action and are driven by three-position step controllers. Electric actuators are also poss-

ible with an integrated (series-connected) positioner and then have a proportional action

and can be driven by continuous controllers.

1 General Part -- Fundamental control technology terms Manual

10 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

- Hydraulic actuators with electric oil pump and electrohydraulic positioner. These have a

proportional action and are also driven by continuous controllers.

These types of actuators can be used to implement continuous controls.

- Temperature control loops with diret electric or gas heating and/or cooling systems are

driven by two-postion controllers (on/off controllers). The two-position controllers with the

heating or cooling medium via relays, external contactors or thyristor controllers. The ma-

nipulated variable y is the on/off ratio. These are referred to as discontinuous controls.

DControllers and control response

The controlled variable x is compared with the command variable w in the input circuit of the

controller, and the system deviation xd is determined. This is processed with or without a

time response into the output signal. The output signal of the amplifier can directly represent

the manipulated variable y if e.g. proportional-action final control elements are to be driven

by it.

In the case of electric actuators, the manipulated variable is produced by the actuator. The

required positioning inrements are derived from the controller ouptut as a pulse-width-modu-

lated signal by conversion.

Depending on the design of this circuit, the controller has a proportional action (P), a propor-

tional-plus-derivative action (PD), a proportional-plus-integral action (PI) or a proportional-

plus-integral-plus-derivative action (PID).

DStep function

If a step function is applied to the controller input, a step-forced response results at the out-

put of the controller in accordance with its time response.

Figure 1-2 Step function

DP controller, step-forced response

Characteristic of the P controller are the proportional gain Kp and the working point yo.The

working point is defined as the value of the output signal at which the system deviation is

zero. If disturbance variables are present, a steady-state deviation may result depending on

yo.

Kp ·xd

Figure 1-3 Step-forced response of P controller

1 General Part -- Fundamental control technology termsManual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 11

DPD controller, step-forced response

In the case of the PD controller, the decaying D component is superimposed on the P com-

ponent. The D component depends on the derivative action gain Vv and the derivative action

time Tv.

Kp ·Vv ·xd

Kp ·xd

yO=0

Figure 1-4 Step-forced response of PD controller

DPI controller, step-forced response

In contrast to the P controller, a steady-state deviation is prevented in the PI controller by

the integral component.

A characteristic of the integral component is the integral action time Tn.

Kp ·xd

Figure 1-5 Step-forced response of PI controller

DPID controller, step-forced response

The PID controller results in improvement of the dynamic control quality as a result of the

additional application of a D component.

Refer to the PD and PI controllers.

Kp ·xd

Figure 1-6 Step-forced response of PID controller

1 General Part -- Fundamental control technology terms Manual

12 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DController output signal

The controller ouptut signal must be adapted to the final control element. The following must

be used according to the type of drive/final control element:

Type of drive/actuator Controller output signal

Electric actuators Three-position step controllers

Pneumatic and hydraulic actuators Continuous controllers

Direct heaters/coolers Two-position controllers

DThree-position step controller with internal feedback

The three-position step controller switches the electric motor of the actuator to clockwise,

stop or counterclockwise by means of relays or semiconductor switches. The rate of adjust-

ment of the actuator can be influenced using different switch-on/pause ratios.

w Command variable

x Controlled variable

xd System deviation

y Manipulated variable

1 Transmitter

2 Stepoint adjuster

3 Three-position switch

4 Feedback with time

response

5 Control amplifier

6 Actuator

0 to 20mA

(4 to 20mA)

Figure 1-7 Function diagram of three-position step controller

The output response to the three-position amplifier in conjunction with the integral-action

actuator permits a “continuous” manipulated variable taking into account the response

threshold.

1 General Part -- Fundamental control technology termsManual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 13

Kp Proportional gain

Tn Integral action time

xd System deviation

Δy Manipulated variable of controller

y Manipulated variable of motor

Kp ·xd

Δy

Figure 1-8 Transient function and parameters of the three-position step controller

DContinuous controller

The controller output 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA acts on the final control element via an

electropneumatic signal converter or an electropneumatic positioner.

xd 3

0to20mA

(4 to 20 mA)

0.2 to 1 bar

w Command variable

x Controlled variable

xd System deviation

y Manipulated variable

1 Transmitter

2 Stepoint adjuster

3 Control amplifier

4 Electropneumatic signal

converter

5 Pneumatic actuator

Figure 1-9 Function diagram of continuous controller

This type of controller is preferentially used in the chemical industry.

1 General Part -- Fundamental control technology terms Manual

14 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DTwo-position controller

The two-position controller (or three-position controller for heating/cooling) is used to activate

relays, contactors or thyristor switches for electric heating or cooling.

-Two-position controller without feedback

In the simplest version without feedback, two-position controllers operate an on/off

switch. The controllers output is switched if the controlled variable violates the upper or

lower limits of the switching hysteresis (x1 and x2). The controlled variable x is subject to

permanent oscillation whose frequency and amplitude depend on the delay time of the

system and the switching hysteresis of the controller.

1 Controller

2 Controlled system

3 Setpoint adjuster

wxd 1

w Command variable

x Controlled variable

y Manipulated variable ON/OFF

z Disturbance variable

Off

Figure 1-10 a) Function diagram b) Switching ouptupt and response of controlled variable

1 General Part -- Fundamental control technology termsManual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 15

-Two-position controller with feedback

In modern two-position controllers with feedack -- such as the SIPART DR21 -- the

switching response is determined by the period, the system deviation and the para-

meters. The period T is set as a fixed value in the controller. The system deviation xd in

conjunctionw ith the parameters Kp/Tn/Tv determines the duty factor (ON/OFF ratio)

within the period. Thus the switching response of the controller is not only triggered by

changes in the controlled variable; appropriate selection of the parameters results in a

largely constant controlled variable x.

1 Control amplifier

2 Controlled system

3 Setpoint adjuster

4 Pulse/pause converter

xd 1

Off

Duty factor 0 %

Duty factor

100 %

2¢100 %

-PeriodT

- System deviation xd

- Parameters Kp, Tn, Tv

w Command variable

x Controlled variable

y Manipulated variable

Z Disturbance variable

TPeriod

*) Duty factor (in % if period)

Figure 1-11 a) Function diagram b) Switching output and resosne of controlled variable

Adjustment of the period (separately for heating/cooling) permits the controller to be

adapted to the special type of heater or the cooling unit. A compromise has to be made

beween the control quality and the degree of wear.

Short period: Improved control quality, but increased wear on contact/heating valve.

Prime use with electric heaters.

Long period: Low wear on contact/heating valve, but poorer control quality. Prime

application with gas heaters or coolers.

1 General Part -- Fundamental control technology terms Manual

16 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

2 Technical Description

2.1 Safety notes and scope of delivery

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 17

2 Technical Description

2.1 Safety notes and scope of delivery

!WARNING

When operating electrical equipment, certain parts of this equipment automati-

cally carry dangerous voltages. Failure to observe these instructions could

therefore lead to serious injury or material damage. Only properly trained and

qualified personnel are allowed to work on this equipment. This personnel must

be fully conversant with all the warnings and commissioning measures as de-

scribed in this user’s guide.

The perfect and safe operation of this equipment is conditional upon proper

transport, proper storage, installation and assembly as well as on careful oper-

ation and commissioning.

DScope of delivery

When the controller is delivered the box also contains:

1 Controller as ordered

1 three-pin plug at 115/230 V AC or special plug at 24 V UC

2 Clamps, pluggable

2 Adhesive labels ”Power supply 115 V” (for 115/230 V-version).

1 CD ROM with documentation

DStandard controllers

The following variants of the SIPART DR21 are available:

Order number: Output stage Power Supply

6DR2100-4 K/S-output 24 V UC

6DR2100-5 K/S-output 115/230 V AC, switchable

DOptions modules (signal converters)

Signal converters have separate ordering- and delivery items.

For handling reasons standard controllers and signal converters which were ordered at the

same time may be delivered by separate mail.

DDocumentation

This user’s guide is available in the following languages:

English C73000-B7476-C143

German C73000-B7400-C143

2 Technical Description

2.2 Range of Application

Manual

18 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DSubject to modifications

The user’s guide has been compiled with great care. However, it may be necessary, within

the scope of product care, to make changes to the product and its operation without prior

notice which are not contained in this user’s guide. We are not liable for any costs ensuing

for this reason.

2.2 Range of Application

DApplication

The SIPART DR21 process controller is a digital instrument of the mid to upper performance

class. It is used in control systems in process engineering for instance in the chemical and

petrochemical industries, control- and power station engineering and in other fields of in-

dustry such as the food- and drink and tobacco industries.

The controller’s great flexibility makes it suitable for use in simple or intermeshed control cir-

cuits. The wide setting range of the control parameters allow the SIPART DR21 to be used

in process engineering both for fast (e.g. flow) and slow controlled systems (e.g. tempera-

ture). The controller determines the optimum control parameters independently on request

without the user being expected to have any prior knowledge of how the control loop may

respond. The applied adaptation procedure is suitable for systems with compensation and

aperiodic transient behavior; Even greater dead times are taken into account. (Systems with-

out compensation cannot be adapted by this method.)

DControlling tasks

The input structure of the SIPART DR21 controller can be changed by configuring in such a

way that the following controlling tasks can be solved.

- Fixed value controls, even with disturbance variables applied at the input

- Three-component controls

- Control circuits with up to two internal setpoints

- Follow-up-/synchronization controls

- Disturbance variables applied at the output

- Computer-controlled circuits in SPC- or DDC-operation

- Ratio controls with fixed or manipulated variables

SIPART DR21 can also be configured as a control unit, manual control unit, process display

or resolver transmitter.

The SIPART DR21 controller can be used as a continuous controller with output 0/4 to

20 mA, as a stepper controller with a built-in relay for controlling motorized drives or as a

two-position controller for heating/cooling systems.

Overlaid control functions or status- and alarm messages are possible through digital inputs-

and outputs.

2 Technical Description

2.3 Features

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 19

2.3 Features

DGeneral

Up to four signal converters can be added to the already generously and extensively equipped, fully

functional standard controller to expand the range of application by plugging them into the slots at

the back of the closed device.

SIPART DR21 offers the following features:

DAnalog inputs

Two analog inputs for current 0/4 to 20 mA, without potential isolation

The SIPART DR21 controller can be expanded to a total of 4 analog inputs with signal

converters.

The following signal converters are available:

Use as (on) Possible signal generators

UNI-

module

AI3 (slot 1) TC/RTD/R/mV, with adapter plug also mA or V, electri-

cally isolated, permissible common mode voltage 50 V.

U/I-

module

AI3 (slot 1)

AI4 (slot 2)

0/4to20mA,0/2to10V,0/0.2Vto1V

Electronic potential isolation, permissible common

mode voltage 10 V.

R-

module

AI3 (slot 1)

AI4 (slot 2)

Resistance potentiometer

In addition, the modules from the previous program (thermocouple/mV and Pt100) can be

used (see SIPART DR20 user’s guide for wiring).

DOutput structure

The SIPART DR21 controller has a y-analog output (manipulated variable) with a current

signal of 0/4 to 20 mA and a switching output with two built-in relays which are interlocked.

The relay lock can be released for a universal digital output. The relays are designed for AC

250 V, a spark quenching combination for wiring with contactors is provided.

The SIPART DR21 can be configured to operate as a continuous controller, a stepper con-

troller for motorized drives or as a two-position controller.

When used as S-controllers, the analog output can be used for outputting x, w or xd for

example.

2 Technical Description

2.3 Features

Manual

20 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

!WARNING

The relays are designed for a maximum switching voltage of AC 250 V/8 A in

overvoltage class III and degree of contamination 2 according to DIN EN

61010 Part 1.

The same applies for the air- and creep lines on the circuit board.

Resonance increases up to three times the rated operating voltage may oc-

cur when phase shift motors are controlled. These voltages are available at

the open relay contact. Therefore such motors may only be controlled under

observance of the technical data and the pertinent safety conditions via isola-

ted switching elements.

DVoltage output

A voltage output L+ for feeding two-wire-transmitters or contacts for digital inputs.

DSlots for options

Four rear slots can be used for functional expansions. The options modules are slot coded

so that wrong installation is largely ruled out.

Slot assignment, see figure 2-2 Rear view, page 25.

DPower supply unit

The power supply unit is designed for the following voltages depending on the standard con-

troller:

- 230 V/115 V AC, switchable by plug-in jumpers in the instrument.

-24VUC

2 Technical Description

2.3 Features

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 21

DDigital inputs

Two digital inputs, potential-bound

It can be upgraded to four or seven potential-bound digital inputs with signal converters.

The digital inputs can be assigned to the following controller-internal switching signals.

bLb Blocking operation

Blocking the entire instrument operation and configuring.

Exception: Switching the w/x-digital display

bLS Blocking structuring

With this signal the controller only allows switching to the

online-parameterization levels outside process operation. In this way the

parameters for adapting the instrument to the process and the necessary

settings for adaptation can be selected. Structuring is blocked.

bLPS Blocking parameterization and structuring

The entire configuring of the instrument is blocked, this means the

parameterization as well. Only the normal process operation according to the

preselected controller type is permitted.

CB Computer-standby

Depending on the controller type, this digital signal together with the

Internal/External key causes either switching in the setpoint range. In

DDC-controllers, DDC-operation begins.

He Manual external

This signal blocks the output of the controller and enables direct manual

adjustment of the manipulated variable on the front control panel.

NTracking

With this signal the output of the K-controller and the three-position-step

controller with external position feedback is tracked to the tracking signal y N.

Si Safety operation

The output of the K-controller or the three-position-stepper controller with

external position feedback accepts the parameterized safety value. In

three-position-stepper controllers with internal position feedback, the

manipulated variable runs defined to 0 or 100 %.

PP-operation

Switching from PI (PID) to P (PD)-controller (i.e. switch off the I-part)

This function simplifies automatic start-up of control circuits.

tS Switching off the setpoint ramp time

tSH Hold on setpoint change (setpoint ramp)

+yBL / --yBL Direction-dependent blocking of the manipulated variable

Direction-dependent limiting of the manipulated variable by external signals,

e.g. from the limit switches of the actuating drives. This limiting is effective in

every operating mode.

2 Technical Description

2.3 Features

Manual

22 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DDigital outputs

Two digital outputs, active, potential-bound.

It can be upgraded to four or six digital outputs with signal converters.

The digital outputs are loadable up to 30 mA per output for direct tripping of relays.

The digital outputs can also be used for the variable output, the relay outputs are then free

for any digital signal output.

The following controller-internal switching signals can be assigned to the digital outputs or

relays.

RB Computer standby

Message that the controller can be switched to the external setpoint by the

CB-signal.

RC Computer operation

Message that the controller is presently in computer operation or that it has

been switched over to the external setpoint by the CB-signal.

HManual mode

Message that the controller has been switched over to manual mode with the

Manual/Automatic key.

Nw Tracking operation active

Message that the controller is in tracking operation.

A1 bis A4 Alarm output Alarm 1 to Alarm 4

MUF group alarm transmitter fault

The instruments’s analog input signals can be monitored for exceeding of the

measuring-range. This signal gives a group alarm if an error is detected.

ΔwOutput of switching signals for setpoint adjustment

This function is only active when the controller is structured as a control unit

(S1=4).

ΔyOutput of the incremental y-adjustment

Assignment is only possible on DO1, 2, 7 or 8 (S57).

The following signal converters are available for extending the digital inputs and outputs:

Use on Description

4 x DO/2 x DI Slot 3 4 binary outputs 24 V

2 binary inputs 24 V

5xDI Slot 3 5 binary inputs 24 V

2xrelays Slot 3 2 relay outputs 35 V

DSerial interface

An interface can be retrofitted with signal converters for RS 232/RS 485 or PROFIBUS DP.

2 Technical Description

2.3 Features

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 23

DOthers

Further functions are also possible. Examples:

Meaning see chapter

Adaptation-

procedure

Automatic determining of the controller parameters by

means of a robust adaptation method which also consider-

ably simplifies commissioning of even critical controlled sys-

tems.

Configuring level

AdAP; 3.9 (page

113) and 5.4.3 (page

156)

adaptive filter for

Filter which dampens amplitude-dependent interference, the

value of the dampening is adapted automatically.

onPA-Parameter tF

3.10.1 (pg. 115) and

5.4.2 (page 155)

Setpoint ramp Prevents the setpoint or nominal ratio being changed too

fast. The desired adjustment speed can be set. The time for

the change is set from 0 to 100 % here. The setpoint ramp is

not active at x-tracking and digital signal tS .

oFPA-Parameter tS;

3.4.1 (pg. 55) and

5.4.4 (pg. 163)

Filter for all inputs A 1st order filter can be connected to every analog input. onPA-Parameters t1

to t4; 3.2 (pg. 47)

and 5.4.2 (pg. 155)

Root extractor for

all controller inputs

A root extractor can be connected before every analog input. Structure switches

S11 to S14; 3.2 (pg.

47) and 5.4.5 (pg.

165)

Linearizer for an

input variable

A linearizer with 13 (equidistant) support points and para-

bolic approximation can be assigned to one of the analog

inputs AI1 to AI4 or to the controlled variable x1.

Structure switch

S21; 3.10.4 (pg.

118) and 5.4.5 (pg.

165)

Initialization of the

display x/w

The controlled variable x and the command variable w can

be displayed in physical values.

oFPA-Parameter dA,

dE; 3.4.1 (pg. 55)

and 5.4.4 (pg. 163)

Limits for the set-

point w

The setpoint can be limited anywhere within the selected

measuring range.

oFPA-Parameter

SA, SE;

3.4.1 (pg. 55) and

5.4.4 (pg. 163)

Limits of the

manipulated

variable y

The manipulated variable y can be limited within the setting

range –10% and +110 %.

(Not in S-controllers with internal feedback)

onPA-Parameter YA,

YE; 3.5 (pg. 91) and

5.4.2 (pg. 155)

x-Tracking The setpoint w is tracked to the controlled variable x in

manual-, tracking- and DDC-operation as well as at the

safety setpoint.

Structure switch

S43; 3.4.1 (pg. 55)

and 5.4.5 (pg. 165)

Limit value alarms Any controller-internal variables or inputs can be monitored

for limit values. The output is by way of alarms A1 to A4.

Structure switches

S76 and S77; 3.10.3

(pg. 117) and 5.4.5

(pg 165)

Transmitter

monitoring

All or specific analog inputs can be monitored for dropping

below- or- exceeding the range. In the event of a fault, the

four-digit digital display outputs a message selectively for

every input. A system fault can be output via the digital out-

put MUF.

Structure switches

S4 to S7, S66; 3.2

(pg. 47) and 5.4.5

(pg. 165)

Adaptation of the

direction of action

SIPART DR21 operates with normal direction in the factory

setting. The direction of the controller can be changed for

reversing systems.

Structure switch

S46; 3.5 (pg 91) and

5.4.5 (pg. 165)

Restart conditions After mains recovery the controller starts automatically with

the structured operating modes, setpoints and manipulated

variables.

Structure switch

S82; 3.10.5 (pg.120)

and 5.4.5 (pg. 165)

2 Technical Description

2.4 Design

Manual

24 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

2.4 Design

DStandard controller

The process controller has a modular structure and is therefore maintenance friendly and

easy to convert- and retrofit.

The standard controller consists of

- the front module with the control- and display elements

- the backplane module with the power supply unit

- the plastic housing with four slots for optional modules

DFront module

The front module accommodates the control- and display elements, the CPU (Central Pro-

cessing Unit) and the connectors for the backplane- and options modules.

It is operated by a membrane keyboard with IP64 degree of protection. The front design is

based directly on the SIPART DR 20/22/24-controller-family with color coded assignment of

the display- and control elements.

For better monitoring of the process, SIPART DR21 has user-friendly analog displays for the

setpoint- and actual value display, a four-digit digital display which can be set for setpoint,

actual value and alarms (depending on the controller setting), a two-digit digital display for

the manipulated variable y, numerous control keys and indicator diodes for various status

signals.

The tag plate and the scales for the analog displays are replaceable.

DBackplane module with power supply unit

The following signal connections are accessible through the backplane.

- 2 analog inputs AI1, AI2, potential-bound to GND, 0/4 to 20 mA

- 1 analog output AO, potential-bound to GND, 0/4 to 20 mA

- 2 digital outputs + Δy,- Δy, potential-free via relay contacts

- 2 digital inputs DI1, DI2, for 24V-logic, function can be set

- 2 digital outputs DO1, DO2, for 24V- logic, function and direction can be set

- 1 Voltage output L+ to the transmitter supply

The power supply is located in a die-cast housing on the backplane module. The heat loss is

transferred to the back of the controller by cooling fins.

A DIN rail can be mounted for connecting a powerful coupling relay module.

The power supply unit is high powered and offers a total 200 mA current for:

- supplying the analog output (0/4 to 20 mA)

- Active digital outputs (up to 6 digital outputs)

- L+-output for supplying two-wire-transmitters

- supplying the interface module

2 Technical Description

2.4 Design

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 25

DConnection technique

The power supply is connected

- for 230 V/115 V AC by a three-pin plug

- for 24 V UC by a special two-pin plug.

On the standard controller the field lines (signal cables) are connected to three functionally

combined plug-in screw-type terminals.

The options modules for analog inputs and digital inputs- and outputs have their own ter-

minals which are also designed as plug-in screw-type terminals.

The interface module is connected by its own plug.

Figure 2-1 Front view

1 Mains plug

2 Power supply unit

3 Slot1 AI3(I/U,R,P,T)

4 Slot2 AI4(I/U,R,P,T)

5 Slot 3 4DO,24 V or

2DO relay or

5DI

6 Slot 4 SES/PROFIBUS-DP

7DINrail

(scope of delivery of the relay module)

8 Terminal block 1

AI1toAI2(I)

9 Terminal block 2

AO1

DI1toDI2

DO1toDO2 24V

L+; M

10 Terminal block 3

Digital outputs ±Δy

Figure 2-2 Rear view

2 Technical Description

2.5 Function principle

Manual

26 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

2.5 Function principle

2.5.1 Standard controller

DGeneral

The SIPART DR21 controller operates on the basis of a modern, highly-integrated microcon-

troller in C-MOS-technology. A large number of functions for controlling processing plants

are stored in the instrument’s ROM. The user can adapt the controller to the task himself by

configuring it.

DAnalog inputs AI1 and AI2.

The analog inputs of the SIPART DR21 are designed for 0/4 to 20 mA input signals. The in-

puts have an input load resistance of 248 Ωand are potential-bound. The start value 0 mA

or 4 mA is determined by the structure switches S4 and S5.

DOutputs for the manipulated variable Y

The standard controller has the following outputs

K-output: switchable between 0 or 4 to 20 mA, potential-bound (S56)

S-output: two relays, NOC, interlocked in factory setting, built-in spark quenching de-

signed for wiring with medium contactors. Other functions can be assigned

to the relay outputs by configuration (structure switches S57 to S68), e.g.

manipulated variable output ±Δy in S-controllers.

DDigital outputs DO1 and DO2

The digital outputs are short-circuit-proof and can drive commercially available relays or the

interface relays 6DR2804-8A/8B directly. Different functions can be assigned to the digital

outputs by configuration (structure switches S57 to S68).

DDigital inputs DI1 and DI2

The inputs are designed in 24-V-logic and are potential-bound. The function is assigned to

the input by configuration of the controller (structure switches S23 to S33).

DCPU

The microcontroller used has integrated AD- and DA-converters and watchdog-circuits for

cycle monitoring. The processor operates with a 64k EPROM (on a socket and therefore

replaceable) and a 1k RAM.

The SIPART DR21 program runs with a fixed cycle time of 100 ms. A process image is gen-

erated at the start of every routine. The analog- and digital inputs, the operation of the front

keyboard and the process variables received by the serial interface are acquired or

accepted. All calculations are made according to the stored functions with these input sig-

nals. Then output to the display elements, the analog outputs and the digital outputs and

2 Technical Description

2.5 Function principle

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 27

storage of the calculated variables for transmission mode of the serial interface take place.

In S-controllers, the program run is interrupted every 5 ms to be able to switch off the S-out-

puts for better resolution. The interface communication also runs in interrupt mode.

DPower supply unit

A cast, overload-protected mains transformer for 115 V or 230 V AC built into a heat sink or

a primary clocked plug-in type power supply unit for 24 V UC built into a heat sink generates

the secondary internal supply voltages +24 V, +5 V and U ref from the power supply. The

metal body rests on protective conductors (protection class I).

The power supply and internal supply voltages are isolated from each other by safe

separation.

The internal supply voltages are function low voltages.

Since no other voltages are generated in the instrument, these statements apply to all field

signal lines with the exception of relay connection lines (used standards see chapter 2.6

Technical data, page 34).

DConfiguring

The controller has a large number of prepared functions for controlling processing plants.

The user programs the instrument himself by selecting the desired functions or setting para-

meters by setting structure switches. The total functioning of the instrument is given by the

combination of the individual structure switches or parameter settings. No programming

knowledge is necessary (see Operation, chapter 5, page 149).

All settings are made without exception on the front operating panel of the SIPART DR21 or

the serial interface.

The job-specific program written in this way is saved in the non-volatile user program mem-

ory.

The instrument is configured as a fixed value controller in the factory setting. This setting

can be restored with the ”APSt”-function at any time.

The following parameterization- and structuring modes are available for configuring the

SIPART DR21 controller.

onPA The transmission properties of the controller and with these the process course

are determined with the online-parameters. They can be changed during control

operation (online)

oFPA The offline-parameters determine the basic functions such as display elements,

limit values, safety values. The controller is blocked (offline) while they are being

set, the last value of the manipulated variable is held.

StrS The instrument structure, e.g. fixed value controller or follow-up controller is de-

termined with the structure switches. The controller is blocked (offline) while

they are being set, the last value of the manipulated variable is held.

APSt The all preset-function restores the factory setting.

2 Technical Description

2.5 Function principle

Manual

28 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

(AdAP) In the adaptation level the output conditions for automatic adaptation of the con-

troller parameters to the process is preset and adaptation started.

(CAE3) The measuring range is set and fine adjustment made if necessary here for the

UNI-module.

The CAE3-menu is only displayed if it has been released in the structuring level

(structure switch S6>3).

2.5.2 Option module

The following option modules are described in this chapter

6DR2800-8J I/U-module

6DR2800-8R R-module

6DR2800-8V UNI-module

6DR2805-8A reference point

6DR2805-8J measuring range plug

6DR2801-8D module with 2 DO (relay)

6DR2801-8E module with 2 DI and 4 DO

6DR2801-8C module with 5 DI

6DR2803-8P serial interface PROFIBUS-DP

6DR2803-8C serial interface RS 232/RS 485

6DR2804-8A module with 4 DO relays

6DR2804-8B module with 2 DO relays

6DR2800-8J I/U-module

DInput variables current 0/4 to 20 mA or voltage 0/0.2 to 1 V or 0/2 to 10 V

The module’s input amplifier is designed as a differentiating amplifier with shuntable gain for

0 to 1 V or 0 to 10 V input signal. For current input signals the 49.9 Ω0.1 % impedance is

switched on by plug-in bridges on the module. The start value 0 mA or 4 mA or 0 V or 0.2 V

(2 V) is defined by configuration in the standard controller. The differentiating amplifier is de-

signed for common mode voltages up to 10 V and has a high common mode suppression.

As a result it is possible to connect the current inputs in series as for electrical isolation when

they have common ground. For voltage inputs this circuit technique makes it possible to sup-

press the voltage drops on the ground conductor by two-pole wiring on potential-bound volt-

age sources. We refer to an electronic potential isolation.

6DR2800-8R R-module

DInput for resistance- or current potentiometer

Potentiometers with rated values of 80 Ωto 1200 Ωcan be connected as resistance trans-

mitters. A constant current of Is = 5 mA is fed to the potentiometer wiper. The wiper resis-

tance is therefore not included in the measurement. Resistors are switched parallel to the

potentiometer by settings on the module and a rough range selection made. Start of scale

and -- full scale are set with the two adjusting pots on the back of the module.

2 Technical Description

2.5 Function principle

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 29

This fine adjustment can be made on the displays on the front module (if structured appropri-

ately). For adjustment with a remote measuring instrument, the analog output can be

assigned to the appropriate input.

The external wiring must be changed for resistance transmitters which cannot withstand the

5 mA wiper current or which have a rated resistance >1 kΩ. The constant current is then not

fed through the wiper but through the whole resistance network of the potentiometer. A volt-

age divider measurement is now made through the wiper. Coarse adjustment is made by a

remote parallel resistor to the resistance potentiometer.

This module can also be used as a current input with adjustable range start and full scale.

The load is 49.9 Ωand is referenced to ground.

6DR2800-8V UNI-module

DDirect connection of thermocouple- or Pt100-sensors, resistance- or mV-transmitters

Measured value sensors such as thermocouples (TC), resistance thermometers Pt100

(RTD), resistance potentiometers (R) or voltage transmitters in the mV-range can be con-

nected directly. The measuring variable is selected by configuring the controller in the

StrS-level (structure switches S6, S8, S9 and S10), the measuring range and the other para-

meters are set in the CAE3-menu. The sensor-specific characteristics (linearization) for ther-

mocouples and Pt100-resistance thermometers are stored in the contoller’s program mem-

ory and are automatically taken into account. No settings need to be made on the module

itself.

The signal lines are connected by a plug terminal block with screw-type terminals. When

using thermocouples with internal reference point, this terminal block must be replaced by

the terminal 6DR2805-8A. With the measuring range plug 6DR2805-8J in place of the ter-

minal block, the measuring range of the direct input (0/20 to 100 mV) can be extended to 0/2

up to 10 V or 0/4 up to 20 mA.

The UNI-module operates with an AD-converter with 18 bit resolution. The measuring inputs

and ground of the standard controller are electrically isolated with a permissible common

mode voltage of 50 V UC.

The UNI-module can only be used at slot 1 (AI3).

6DR2805-8A Reference point

DTerminal with internal reference point for thermocouples

This terminal is used in connection with the UNI-module for temperature measuring with

thermocouples at an internal reference point. It consists of a temperature sensor which is

pre-assembled on a terminal block and plated to avoid mechanical damage.

2 Technical Description

2.5 Function principle

Manual

30 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

6DR2805-8J Measuring range plug

DMeasuring range plug for current 0/4 to 20 mA or voltage 0/2 to 10 V

The measuring range plug is used in connection with the UNI-module to measure current- or

voltage. The input variable is reduced to a signal range of 0/20 to 100 mV by a voltage di-

vider or shunt resistors in the measuring range plug.

Wiper resistors with 250 Ωor 50 Ωare available optionally at 2 different terminals for 0/4 to

20 mA-signals.

The electrical isolation of the UNI-module is retained even when the measuring range plug is

used.

6DR2801-8D 2 DO relays

DDigital output module with 2 relay contacts

To convert 2 digital outputs to relay contacts up to 35 V UC.

This module is equipped with 2 relays whose switching contacts have potential free outputs.

The RC-combinations of the spark quenching elements are respectively parallel to the rest-

and working contacts.

In AC-consumers with low power the current flowing through the capacitor of the spark

quenching element when the contact is open may interfere (e.g. the hold current of some

switching elements is not exceeded). In this case the capacitors (1 μF) must be removed

and replaced with low capacitance capacitors.

The 68 V suppressor diodes parallel to the capacitors act additionally to reduce the induced

voltage.

CAUTION

The relays used on the digital output module are designed for a maximum

rating up to UC 35 V. The same applies for the air- and creep lines on the

circuit board. Higher voltages may therefore only be switched through appro-

priately approved series connected circuit elements under observance of the

technical data and the pertinent safety regulations.

6DR2801-8E 2 DI and 4 DO

DDigital signal module with two digital inputs and 4 digital outputs

The module serves to extend the digital inputs and digital outputs already existing in the

standard controller.

The inputs are designed in 24-V-logic and are potential-bound. The functions are assigned to

the inputs- and outputs by configuration of the controller. (Structure switches S23 to S33,

S58toS68).

The digital outputs are short-circuit-proof and can drive commercially available relays or the

interface relays 6DR2804-8A/8B directly.

2 Technical Description

2.5 Function principle

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 31

6DR2801-8C 5 DI

DDigital input module with 5 digital inputs

The module serves to extend the digital inputs already existing in the standard controller.

The inputs are designed in 24-V-logic and are potential-bound. The function is assigned to

the input by configuration of the controller (structure switches S23 to S33).

6DR2803-8P serial interface PROFIBUS-DP

The 6DR2803-8P module is a PROFIBUS-DP-interface module with RS-485-driver and electri-

cal isolation from the instrument. It operates as an intelligent converter module and adapts the

private SIPART- to the open PROFIBUS-DP-protocol.

This options card can be used in all SIPART-DR-instruments in slot 4. The following settings

must be made with the appropriate structure switches for the serial interfaces.

- Interface on

- Even parity

- LRC without

- Baud rate 9600

- Parameters/process values writable (as desired)

- Station number of choice 0 to 125

Make sure that the station number is not assigned double on the bus. The PROFIBUS-module

serves to connect the SIPART-controllers to a master system for control and monitoring. In

addition the parameters and structure switches of the controller can be read and written.

Up to 32 process variables can be selected and read out cyclically by configuration of the

PROFIBUS-module.

The process data are read out of the controller in a polling procedure with an update time

<300 ms. If the master write process data to the slave, these become active after a maximum

of one controller cycle.

A technical description including the controller-base-file (*.GSD) is available in Internet for creat-

ing a master-slave-linking software for interpreting the identifications and useful data from and

to the SIPART-controller.

Internet address: www.fielddevices.com [Edition: 05.2000])

The SIPART S5 DP and SIPART S7 DP programs are offered for DP-masters SIMATIC S5 and

S7.

2 Technical Description

2.5 Function principle

Manual

32 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

6DR2803-8C Serial interface RS 232/RS 485

DSerial interface for RS 232 or RS 485 with electrical isolation

Can be used in slot 4, the structure switches S84 to S91 must be set for the transmission

procedure.

For connecting the controller SIPART DR21 to a master system for control and monitoring.

All process variables can be sent, the external setpoint, tracking variable, operating states,

parameters and structurings sent and received via the interface.

Interface communication can take place:

RS 232 as a point-to-point connection

SIPART Bus The SIPART bus driver is no longer available.

Therefore, please realize multi--couplings via RS 485 or PROFIBUS DP.

RS 485 As a serial data bus with up to 32 users.

The interface module 6DR2803-8C offers electrical isolation between Rxd/Txd and the con-

troller. Switching can be performed between RS 232 and RS 485 with a plug-in bridge.

A detailed technical description of the data communication for creating a linking software is

available in Internet under www.fielddevices.com [Edition 05.2000].

Rxd/

Txd B

Rxd/

Txd A

24 V

Txd

Rxd -1

+7.5 V

-7.5 V

+7.5V

-7.5 V

-7.5V

Rxd

Txd

Other connections: NC

24 V

Txd

Rxd

Other connections: NC

Rxd/

Txd

NC2, 7

+7.5 V

+7.5V

SIPART

bus

RS 485

RS 485+150R

RS 232

Figure 2-3 Block diagram serial interface in

RS 232/SIPART BUS

Figure 2-4 Block diagram serial interface at

Interface RS 485

2 Technical Description

2.5 Function principle

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 33

6DR2804-8A module with 4 DO-relays

6DR2804-8B module with 2 DO-relays

DCoupling relay module with 2 or 4 relays

To convert 2 or 4 binary outputs to relay contacts up to 230 V UC.

The relays can be snapped onto a mounting rail on the back of the controller. The mounting

rail is delivered with the coupling relay module.

One or two relay modules are installed per version. Each of these modules consists of two

relays with quench diodes parallel to the control winding. Every relay has a switching contact

with spark quenching in both switching branches. In AC-consumers with a very low power,

the current flowing (e.g. hold current in contactors) through the spark quenching capacitor

(33nF) when the contact is open interferes. In this case they should be replaced by capaci-

tors of the same construction type, voltage strength and lower value.

The switching contact is fed to the plug terminals with 3 poles so that the rest and working

circuits can be switched. The relays can be controlled directly from the controller’s digital

outputs by external wiring.

!CAUTION

The relays used on the interface relay module are designed for a maximum

rating of AC 250 V in overvoltage class III and contamination factor 2 according

to DIN EN 61010 Part 1.

The same applies for the air- and creep lines on the circuit board.

Resonance increases up to double the rated operating voltage may occur when

phase shift motors are controlled. These voltages are available at the open re-

lay contact. Therefore such motors may only be controlled under observance of

the technical data and the pertinent safety conditions via approved switching

elements.

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

34 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

2.6 Technical Data

2.6.1 General data

Installation position any

Climate class to IEC 721

Part 3--1 Storage 1k2

Part 3--2 Transport 2k2

Part 3--3 Operation 3k3

--2 5 to +75 _C

0to+50_C

Type of protection according to EN 60529

Front

Housing

Connections

IP64

IP30

IP20

Housing design

DElectrical safety

-- acc. to DIN EN 61 010 part 1,

-- Protection class I acc. to IEC 536

-- Safe disconnection between mains connection and field signals

-- Air and creep lines, unless specified otherwise, for overvoltage class III and degree of

contamination 2

DEC Declaration of Conformity No. A5E00065058I--01

-- Conformity

The product described above in the form as delivered is in conformity with the

provisions of the following European Directives:

2004/108/EC EMC

Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the approximation of the

laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and repealing

Directive 89/336/EEC

2006/95/EC LVD

Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council on the harmonisation of the

laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain

voltage limits.

DSpurious emission, interference immunity according to EN 61 326, NAMUR NE21 8/98

Weight, standard controller approx. 1.2 kg

Color

Front module frame

Front surface

RAL 7037

RAL 7035

Material

Housing, front frame

Front foil

Backplanes, modules

Polycarbonate, glass-fiber reinforced

Polyester

Polybutylenterephthalate

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 35

Connection technique

Power Supply

115/230 V AC

24 V UC

Field signals

Three-pin plug IEC320/V DIN 49457A

Special 2-pin plug

Plug-in terminals for 1.5 mm2AWG 14

1) Installation depth necessary for

changing the main board

and modules

relay module

6DR2804-8A/B

Figure 2-5 Dimensions SIPART DR21, dimensions in mm

Number of Cut-out

controllers width b

2) Under consideration of the permissible ambient tempera-

ture, tight installation one above the other is allowed

Figure 2-6 Panel cut-outs, dimensions in mm

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

36 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

2.6.2 Standard controller

Power Supply

Rated voltage 230 V AC 115 V AC 24 V UC

switchable

Operating voltage range 195 to

264 V AC

97 to

132 V AC

20 to

28 V AC

20 to

35 V DC1)

Frequency range 48 to 63 Hz -- -- --

External current IExt2) 200 mA

Power consumption

Standard controller without options

without IExt active power/apparent

power (capacitive)

Standard controller with options

without IExt active power/apparent

power (capacitive)

Standard controller with options with

IExt active power/apparent power

(capacitive)

5W/9VA

11 W/15 VA

15 W/19 VA

5W/9VA

11 W/15 VA

15 W/19 VA

4W/6VA

8.5W/12VA

12 W/17 VA

8.5 W

12 W

Permissible voltage breaks based on

0.85 U Nand max. load

Time3) ≤20 ms ≤20 ms ≤20 ms ≤20 ms

1) including harmonic

2) current transmitted from L+, DO, AO to external loads

3) The load voltages of the AO are reduced hereby to 13 V, L+ to 15 V and the DO to 14 V

Table 2-1 Power supply standard controller

Analog inputs AI1 to AI2

Current

Rated signal range 0/4 to 20 mA

Modulationrange -0.1to22mA

Input resistance

Difference (load) 248 Ω±1%

Filter time constant 10 ms

Zero error see AD-converter

Full scale error see AD-converter

Linearity error see AD-converter

Temperature influence see AD-converter

Static destruction limit ±40 mA

Parameterizable transmitter fault message

AI1/2 0 mA to 20 mA

4mAto20mA ≤-0.5 %;

≤-2.5 %; ≥106.25 %

≥106.25 %

AI3/4 0/4 mA to 20 mA ≤-2.5 %; ≥106.25 %

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 37

Digital inputs DI1, DI2

Signal status 0 ≤4.5 V or open

Signal status 1 ≥13 V

Input resistance ≥27 kΩ

Static destruction limit 35 V

.NOTE

All error specifications refer to the rated signal range

Analog outputs AO

Rated signal range (0 to 100 %) 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA

Modulation range 0 to 20.5 mA or 3.8 to 20.5 mA

Load voltage from --1 to 18 V

No-load voltage ≤26 V

Inductive load ≤0.1 H

Time constant 10 ms

Residual ripple 900 Hz ≤0.2 %

Resolution ≤0.1 %

Load dependence ≤0.1 %

Zero error ≤0.3 % 1)

Full scale error ≤0.3 % 1)

Linearity ≤0.05 %

Temperature influence

Zero point

Full scale ≤0.1%/10K

≤0.1%/10K

Static destruction limit --1 to 35 V

S-output (relay 230 V) DO7 and DO8

- Contact material Ag / Ni

- Contact load capacity

Switching voltage

DC ≤250 V

≤250 V

Switching current Contacts Contacts

locked unlocked

DC ≤8A ≤2.5 A

≤8A ≤2.5 A

Rating

DC ≤1250 VA

≤30 W at 250 V

≤100 W at 24 V

1) Applies for interference acc. to IEC 801-3 to 3 V/m, with 10 V/m at 290 to 310 MHz ≤4.3 %

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

38 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Service life

mechanical

230 V AC 8A electrical ohmic

2¢107switching cycles

105switching cycles

Spark quenching element Series circuit 22 nF/220 Ωparallel to it

varistor 420 Vrms

Digital outputs DO1 to DO2 (with wired-or diodes)

Signal status 0 ≤1.5 V

Signal status 1 +19 V to 26 V

load current ≤30 mA

Short-circuit current ≤50 mA

Static destruction limit -1 V to +35 V

Measuring transmitter feed L+

Ratedvoltage +20to26V

load current ≤60 mA, short-circuit-proof

Short-circuit current ≤200 mA clocking

Static destruction limit --1 to +35 V

CPU data

Cycle time 100 ms

Minimum integration speed dy

kp ⋅xd

0.1 ⋅0.1 %

104s

A/D conversion except UNI module

6DR2800-8V

Procedure Successive approximation per input > 120

conversions and averaging within 20 or

16.67 ms

Modulation range -5 % to 105 % of the modulation range

Resolution 11 bits ≙0.06 % of the modulation range

Zero error ≤0.2 % of the modulation range

Full scale error ≤0.2 % of the modulation range

Linearity error ≤0.2 % of the modulation range

Temperature influence

Zero point ≤0.05 %/10 K of the modulation range

Full scale ≤0.1 %/10 K of the modulation range

Setpoint- and manipulated variable

adjustment

Setting With 2 keys (more - - less)

Speed progressive

Resolution wi

1 digit

0.1%ofratedrange0to20mA

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 39

Parameters

Setting With two keys (more -- less)

Speed progressive

Resolution

Linear parameters, % ≤0.1 %

Linear parameters, physical 1 digit

Logarithmic parameters 128 values/octave

Accuracy

Time parameters 2%

All others Resolution accordingly, absolute

Display technique

-- x- and w-Digital display 4digit 7-segment LED

Color red

Digit height 7 mm

Display range Adjustable start and end

Number range --1999 to 9999

Overrun <--1999: --oFL

>9999: oFL

Decimal point adjustable (fixed point) _.------ to --------

Refresh rate Adjustable 0.1 to 9.9 s

Resolution 1 digit but not better than AD-converter

Display error corresponding to AD-converter and analog

inputs

-- x- and w-Analog display LED array vertical 30 LEDs

Color x

red

green

Display range 0 to 100 %

Overrun flashing first or last LED

Refresh rate cyclic

Resolution 1.7 % by alternate glowing of 1 or 2 LEDs,

the center of the illuminated field serves as

a pointer

-- y-display (digital) 2digit 7-segment-LED

Color red

Digit height 7 mm

Display range 0 to 100 %

Overrun -9 % to 109 %, display >99 % h0 to h9

Refresh rate Adjustable 0.1 s to 9.9 s

Resolution 1 %

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

40 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

2.6.3 Option module

6DR2800-8J/R Analog inputs AI3 (slot 1), AI4 (slot 2)

Signal converter for

Order number:

Current

6DR2800-8J

Voltage

6DR2800-8J

Resistance

potentiometer

6DR2800-8R

Range start

Min. span (100 %)

Max. zero point suppression

Range full scale

Dynamic range

0or4mA1)

20 mA

--4to115%

0Vor2V

or 199.6 mV 1)

10 V, 998 mV

--4to115%

0Ω

ΔR≥0.3 R 3)

RA ≤0.2 R 3)

1.1 R 3)

--4to115%

Transmitter fault message MUF --2,5 % ≥MUF ≥106.25 %

Input resistance

Difference

Common mode

Permissible common mode voltage

Supply current

Line resistance

Three-wire-circuit

49.9 Ω0.1 %

500 kΩ

0to+10V

200 kΩ

≥200 kΩ

0to+10V

5mA5%

per <10 Ω

Filter time constant 20 % 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms

Error 2)

Zero point

Gain

Linearity

Common mode

≤0.3 %

≤0.5 %

≤0.05 %

≤0.07 %/V

≤0.2 %

≤0.05 %

≤0.02 %/V

≤0.2 %

Influence of temperature 2)

Zero point

Gain ≤0.05 %/10 K

≤0.1%/10K ≤0.02 %/10 K

≤0.1%/10K ≤0.1%/10K

≤0.3%/10K

Static destruction limit

between the inp.

referenced to M 40 mA

35 V

500 V

35 V

500 V

35 V

500 V

1) Start of measuring by structuring

2) Without errors of A/D-converter

3) with R = RA +ΔR + RE adjustable in three ranges: R = 200 Ω, R = 500 Ω, R = 1000 Ω

Table 2-2 Technical data for module 6DR2800-8J/R

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 41

6DR2800-8V UNI-module Analog input AI3 (slot 1)

Analog input AI3 mV 1) TC 2) Pt100 R R

Slot 1 C R ≤600 ΩR≤2.8 kΩ

StartofscaleMA

Full scale ME

≥-175 mV

≤+175 mV

≥-175 mV

≤+175 mV

≥-200 C

≤+850 C

≥0Ω

≤600 Ω

≥0Ω

≤2.8 kΩ

Span Δ=ME--MA parameterizable 0 to Δmax

Min. recommended span 5mV 5mV 10 K 30 Ω70 Ω

Transmitter fault message MUF -2.5 % ≥MUF ≥106.25 % 3)

Input current ≤1μA≤1μA-- -- --

Supply current -- -- 400 μA400 μA140 μA

Potential isolation

Test voltage 500 V AC

Perm. common mode voltage ≤50 V UC ≤50 V UC -- -- --

Line resistance

2L: RL1+RL4 ≤1kΩ≤300 Ω≤50 Ω-- --

3L: (RL1) = RL2 = RL4 -- -- ≤50 Ω-- --

4L: RL1 to RL4 -- -- ≤100 Ω-- --

Open loop signaling without ≥500 to

550 Ω

all

terminals

Open loop between

Terminal 2--3

Error

Transmission ±10 μV±10 μV±0.2 K ±60 mΩ±200 mΩ

Linearity ±10 μV±10 μV±0.2 K ±60 mΩ±200 mΩ

Resolution/noise ±5μV±2μV±0.1 K ±30 mΩ±70 mΩ

Common mode ±1μV/10 V ±1μV/10 V -- -- --

Internal reference point -- ±0.5 K -- -- --

Temperature error

Transmission ±0.05 %/10 K 3)

Internal reference point -- ±0.1K/10K -- -- --

Static destruction limit ±35 V ±35 V -- -- --

Cycle time 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 200 ms 200 ms

Filter time constant adaptive 4) <1.5 s <2 s <2 s <1.5 s <1.5 s

1) 20 mA, 10 V with measuring range plug 6DR2805-8J

2) Types, see structure switches, internal reference point (plug-in terminal block) 6DR2805-8A

3) Reference to parameterizable span Δ=ME--MA

4) In series with adaptive filter changeable by time constant t3 (onPA)

Table 2-3 Technical data for UNI-module 6DR2800-8V

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

42 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

6DR2805-8J Measuring range plug 20 mA/10 V

-- 20 m A

conversion to 100 mV ±0,3 %

Load terminal 1--2 50 Ω

1--3 250 Ω

Stat. destruction limit ±40 mA

-- 10 V

divider to 100 mV ±0,2 %

Input resistance 90 kΩ

Statistical destruction limit ±100 V

6DR2801-8D 2DO Relay

35 V

Digital outputs DO3 and DO4 (slot 3)

-- Contact material Ag / Ni

-- Contact load capacity

Switching voltage

DC ≤35 V

≤35 V

Switching current

DC ≤5A

≤5A

Rating

DC ≤150 VA

≤100 W at 24 V

≤80 W at 35 V

-- Service life

mechanical 2x107switching cycles

electrical

24 V/4 A ohmic

24 V/1 A inductive

2x106switching cycles

2x105switching cycles

-- Spark quenching element

Series circuit 1 μF/22 Ωparallel to it varistor 75 Vrms

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 43

6DR2801-8E 4DO 24 V, 2DI Digital outputs DO3 to DO6 and DI3 to DI4 (slot 3)

-- Digital outputs

Signal status 0 ≤1.5 V or open, residual current ≤50 μA

Signal status 1 19 to 26 V

load current ≤30 mA

Short-circuit current ≤50 mA, clocking

Static destruction limit --1 V to +35 V

-- Digital inputs

Signal status 0 ≤4.5 V or open

Signal status 1 ≥13 V

Input resistance ≥27 kΩ

Static destruction limit 35 V

6DR2801-8C 5DI 24 V Digital inputs DI3 to DI7 (slot 3)

Signal status 0 ≤4.5 V or open

Signal status 1 ≥13 V

Input resistance ≥27 kΩ

Statistical destruction limit ±35 V

6DR2803-8P PROFIBUS-DP

Transmittable signals RS 485, PROFIBUS-DP-protocol

Transmittable data Operating state, process variables, para-

meters and structure switches

Transmission procedure PROFIBUS-/

DP-protocol

According to DIN 19245, Part 1 and Part 3

(EN 50170)

Data rate 9.6 kbit/s to 1.5 Mbit/s

except 45.45 kBit/s

Station number 0 to 125

Time monitoring of the data communication structurable on the controller in connection

with DP-watchdog

Electrical isolation between Rxd/Txd-P/-N and

the controller 50 V UC common mode voltage

Test voltage 500 V AC

Repeater-control signal CNTR-P TTL-level with 1 TTL-load

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

44 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Supply voltage VP (5 V) 5 V -0.4 V/+0.2 V; short-circuit-proof

line lengths, per segment at 1.5 Mbit/s 200 m, see ET 200-Manual 6ES5 998-

3ES12 for further details

6DR2803-8C Serial interface

Transmittable signals RS 232, RS 485 or SIPART BUS *) shun-

table

Transmittable data Operating state, process variables, para-

meters and structure switches

Transmission procedure According to DIN 66258 A or B

Character format 10 bits (start bit, ASCII-characters with

7 bits, parity bit and stop bit)

Hamming-distance h 2 or 4

Data rate 300 to 9600 bit/s

Transmission Asynchronous, semiduplex

Addressable stations 32

Time monitoring of the data communication 1 s to 25 s or without

Electrical isolation between Rxd/Txd

and the controller

max. common mode voltage

Test voltage

50 V UC

500 V AC

RS 232 RS 485

Receiver input Rxd

Signal level 0

Signal level 11)

Input resistance

0to+12V2)

-3 to -12 V 2)

13 kΩ

UA>U

B,+0.2to+12V

UA<U

B,-0.2to-12V

12 Ω

Send output Txd

Signal level 0

Signal level 1 1) +5 to +10 V

-5 to -10 V

UA>U

B,+1.5to+6V

UA<U

B,-1.5to-6V

Load resistance ≤1.67 mA 54 Ω

1) Signal status 1 is the rest status

2) Input protected with 14 V Z-diode, higher voltages with current limiting to 50 mA possible.

Line capacitance and lengths

at 9600 bits/s

Line capacitance Reference values line lengths

Ribbon cable without shield Round cable with shield

RS 232 point-

to-point ≤2.5 nF 50 m 10 m

RS 485 bus ≤250 nF 1,000 m 1,000 m

*) SIPART bus operation is no longer possible!

The bus driver is no longer available!

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 45

6DR2804-8A/B Coupling relay 230 V

1 relay module 6DR2804-8B

2 relay modules 6DR2804-8A

per relay module 2 relays with 1 switching contact each with

spark quenching element

- Contact material Silver-cadmium oxide

Switching voltage

AC ≤250 V

DC ≤250 V

Switching current

AC ≤8A

DC ≤8A

Rating

AC ≤1250 VA

DC ≤30 W at 250 V

≤100 W at 24 V

- Service life

mechanical 2×107switching cycles

electrical AC 220 V, ohmic 2×106/I(A) switching cycles

- Spark quenching element Series circuit 22 nF/220 Ωparallel

plus varistor 420 V rms

- Exciter winding

Voltage +19 to +30 V

resistance 1.2 kΩ180 Ω

- Electrical isolation between

Exciter winding -- contacts

Relay module – relay module

(6DR2805-8A)

Safe isolation 1) by reinforced isolation, air-

and creep lines for overvoltage class III 1)

and degree of contamination 2 1)

contact -- contact

of a relay module

Safe isolation 1) by reinforced insulation,

air- and creep lines for overvoltage class II

1) and degree of contamination 2 1)

1) according to DIN EN 61010 Part 1

- Type of protection

Housing IP50 according to DIN 40050

Connections (in plugged state) IP20 according to DIN 40050

2 Technical Description

2.6 Technical Data

Manual

46 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

- Housing material Polyamide 66

- Mounted on rail NS 35/7.5 DIN EN 50022

NS 35/15 DIN EN 50035

NS 32 DIN EN 50035

- Dimensioned drawing see fig. 2-7

NS 35/15

Center of the

mounting rail

139

136

100

130

131.5

NS 32

NS 35/7.5

Figure 2-7 Dimensioned drawing coupling relay, dimensions in mm

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.1 General

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 47

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.1 General

The controller is adapted to the respective job by structure switches. The factory setting corre-

sponds to the most usual setting of the individual functions so that only few structure switches

usually need to be set selectively during commissioning. However, it is recommendable to com-

pare the compatibility of the individual structure switch settings with the task in any case.

The structure switches S1 and S2 are fundamentally important. With S1 the controller type is

set and thus the processing of command variable, main controlled variable and auxiliary con-

trolled variables up to control difference generation determined. With S2 the controller output

structure is set and thus the processing of the automatic-manual-, safety- and tracking variables

as well as the manipulated variable output determined as a K- or S-output.

The functions of structure switches S3 to S81 correspond to the logical order of signal proces-

sing. S82 and S83 describe the restart conditions, S84 to S91 the transmission procedure of

the serial interface.

The structure switches are described in this order in the following description.

.NOTE

The control elements on the front are shown on page 5 and specified by the

digits in the text in brackets. The structure switches are designated by S**.

3.2 Analog input signal processing (S3 to S21)

see fig. 3-1, page 49

Each of the maximum 4 analog inputs is fed through an AD-converter which performs the 50 or

60 Hz interference suppression (S3) by averaging over 20 or 16 2/3 ms. Then standardization

to 0 to 100% calculated value takes place per channel of the signal range 0 to 20 mA or 4 to

20 mA. The UNI-module is structured with S6> 3 and S8 determines its input signal. S9 deter-

mines the thermocouple type when a thermocouple input is chosen. The temperature unit for

PT100- or thermocouple signals is determined with S10.

At the same time S4 to S7 decide whether operation is to take place with or without range moni-

toring (transmitter fault). A separate AD-converter routine without averaging is responsible for

monitoring so that the manual mode which is possible with S50 comes into action bumplessly in

the event of a transmitter fault. The monitor signals per channel on dropping below -2.5% or

exceeding +106.25 % with a hysteresis of 0.25 % on the digital x/w-display. By an OR link of all

single messages the group transmitter fault MUF is formed which can be assigned to the digital

outputs and negated optionally (see figure 3-1, page 49 and chapter 3.8, page 111). Only the

analog inputs selected with the transmitter fault monitor are monitored, displayed on the front

panel (the appropriate position stays dark in the case of analog inputs not selected with trans-

mitter fault) and signaled with the OR link. The error message is acknowledged with the Shift

key (12). The fault message signal via the OR link is available until the selected analog inputs

are back in the working range.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.2 Analog input signal processing (S3 to S21)

Manual

48 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

After range monitoring, the 4 analog inputs are each fed through a 1st order filter (parameters

t1 to t4 can be set in the parameterization mode onPA). The factory setting is 1 s.

Now the root of every channel can be extracted with S11 to S14 and they can be linearized with

S21. This allows non-linear process variables to be represented physically correctly as well (see

chapter3.10.4 (page 118 for function principle) setting of the 13 vertex values, see fig. 3-35, page

119).

The controllers-, manipulated- or disturbance variables to be processed for the controller types

(S1) can be acquired with S15 to S20 from the 4 analog inputs.

The disturbance variable z is connected either by the D-element or directly to the controller out-

put (S47). yNserves as a tracking input for the manipulated variable in K-controllers (S2=0) or

S-controllers with external feedback (S2=3) and yRas a manipulated variable feedback in

S-controllers with internal feedback (S2=2) or as a position feedback in S-controllers with exter-

nal feedback (S2=3).

The controllers- or process variables are available for assignment to the analog output (S6) and

the limit value signal (S76 to S80) and can be read in via the SES. With this input structure

most control tasks can be solved in connection with the different controller types and controller

output structures.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.2 Analog input signal processing (S3 to S21)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 49

Slot 1

S6< 4

4to20mA

0, 1

2, 3

-- U

1S11

tF1

AI1

+1/2

--1/1

AI2

+1/4

--1/3

S21

4to20mA

0, 1

2, 3

-- U

1S12

tF2

S21

4to20mA

0, 1

2, 3

S13

tF3

S21

S6≥4

S8, S9

Slot 2

4to20mA

0, 1

2, 3

50 Hz 60 Hz

S21

1S14

S21

tF4

50 % S7

0,2

1,3

4,5

6,7

0,2

1,3

0,2

1,3

1,3 --3 106

--3 106

x/w display

Transmitter fault-

signaling

1234

S21

0/1/2/3/4

34S15

S16

S17

x3/wEA/

wvEA

S18 YN

S19

S20

MUF

AI3

I, U, R

AI4

I, U, R

0/2/3/4/5

0/1/3/4/5

0/1/2/4/5

0/1/2/3/5

0, 2

UNI

AI1

AI2

AI3

AI4

AI2A

AI1A

AI3A

AI4A

Figure 3-1 Analog input signal processing

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.3 Digital input signal processing (S23 to S41)

Manual

50 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

3.3 Digital input signal processing (S23 to S41)

DAssignment and direction of effect of the digital inputs (S23 to S40)

see figure 3-2, page 52

The control signals CB, He ...bLS, bLPS, tSH are assigned by the structure switches S23 to

S33, S92 to the digital inputs DI1 to DI7 or the Lo status. The High status is also possible

when assigning CB (S23) and P (S27). The control signals can be negated optionally by the

structure switches S34 to S40.

The digital inputs DI1 and DI2 of the standard controller can be extended by DI3 to DI7 for

example with the option module 5DI (6DR2801-8C) in slot 3 (S22 = 2).

When using the module 4DO 24 V + 2DI (6DR2801-8E) it is possible to extend by two (DI3,

DI4) inputs (S22=1).

When using option modules in slot 3, structure switch S22 must be set according to the as-

signment, otherwise there will be an error message (see chapter 5.5, page 179 ).

All digital inputs can be read by the SES.

DLinking the digital inputs DI1 to DI7 with the control signals via the SES.

(S41, S42, S51 and S85)

see figure 3-3, page 53

The control signal CB (S23) may be available at the digital input (S41) either as a static sig-

nal or as a pulse (key operation on control desk). Every positive edge trips the flip-flop when

selecting the pulse input. In the following descriptions the output status of the flip-flop is as-

sumed as CB.

All control signals (bLb as of software --B3, tSH as of software --B5) can also be specified in

S85 = 2, 3, (4, 5)1) via the SES and or-linked with the corresponding control signals by the

digital inputs. Since the top operation hierarchy in a computer link should be with the autar-

chic single controller, the control signals can be switched off by the SES by rounding with

RC = Int∧CB via the Internal/External key (16) of the controller or via CB ES (optionally

time-monitored) or via CBDI (central Computer Fail line) .

In addition the internal flip-flop can be activated at S85 = 2 to 5 parallel to pressing the keys

via IntES.

The CB-signal is formed at S85 = 2, (4)1) as an OR-function of CB ES via the serial interface

and CB DI via a digital input so that operation can take place optionally with one signal.

1) as of software version --A5

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.3 Digital input signal processing (S23 to S41)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 51

At S85 = 3, (5)1) the OR-function is replaced by an AND-function so that the CB set by the

SES can be reset via a central Computer Fail line.

At the same time, S85 switches over the sources for the external setpoint wES or wEA and

for the tracking manipulated variable yES or yN. The depth of intervention is determined addi-

tionally by the serial interface. This makes it possible to specify the process variables ana-

logly for example and the corresponding status signals via the SES.

The function RC = Int∧CB (computer operation) also controls the command variable switch-

ing in the controller types S1 = 0 to 4, i.e. also in SPC-operation or the disturbance variable

switching in DDC-operation (see chapter 3.4, page 55).

The two controller types S1 = 5/6 operate without command variable switching. The Internal

key and the control signal CB are available with the link RC =Int∨CB for locking operation

through the serial interface (e. g. when linking to control systems).

At S41 = 0 a static switchover by the logic function RC = Int∧CB takes place. In the case of

the preset to Int (Internal LED (17) off) you can switch statically with CB between controller

values and computer values (command- and manipulated variables). The computer

standby CB is displayed negated by the C-LED (18) (C =CB,CB=1≙CLED off). The

computer standby of the controller is signaled negated as a message signal RB = Int. Com-

puter operation RC is also signalled negated as a message signal RC = Int∧CB .

At S41 = 1 static switching with acknowledgement takes place. Every time the computer is

recovered (CB from 0 !1) If the internal flip-flop is set to 1 (internal LED on, C LED off), so

that computer operation RC = Int∧CB only becomes effective after pressing the internal key

(Int = 0).

With S42 = 0/2 the internal/external key is set out of order and only internal- or external

operation is pre-selected.

The control signal H is generated as an OR-function by the Manual-/Automatic key (11) with

subsequent flip-flop (Hi) and the control signal He whereby He can be preset by the SES or

the digital inputs in the way described above.

With the structure switch S51 Automatic-/Manual switching can be blocked at the controller

front (S51 =1 only Automatic or S51 = 2 only Manual. It is still possible to switch to manual

operation by He in the ”Only Automatic” position. The Manual LED (12) always indicates the

active status (see also chapter 3.6, page 94).

At S51 = 0 to 2, He is connected statically by both the SES and the digital inputs. At S51 =

3/4 the connection is made dynamically, i.e. every positive edge causes manual-automa-

tic-manual operation switching. In addition, with structure switch S51 = 4 the locking of HeES

with RC =Int∨CB is released.

1) as of software version --A5

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.3 Digital input signal processing (S23 to S41)

Manual

52 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

3/1

3/2

3/3

3/4

3/5

1/5

1/6

3/1

3/6

DI1

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

DI7

DI3

DI4

Assignment

with structure

switches

81)

5DI S22=2

4DO+2DI

S22=1

Slot 3

S**

S24

S25

S26

S27

S29

S30

S31

S32

S33

S23

CBDI

SiDI

PDI

-yBLDI

+yBLDI

HeDI

NDI

S34

S35

S36

S37

S38

S39

S40

S28

bLbDI

bLSDI

bLPSDI

1) only for CB (S23) and P (S27)

2) as of software --B5

tSDI

24 V

DI2

24 V

Structure-

switch setting

S92

tSHDI 2)

S39

--1

Figure 3-2 Assignment and direction of action of the digital inputs S23 to S40

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.3 Digital input signal processing (S23 to S41)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 53

0/2 (3/4)1)

S51

0/1

CBDI

0,1,2,3

S51

2/3/(4/5)1)

S51 3/4

0/1/2

S51 3/4

0/1/2

2/3 (4/5)1)

S85

0,1

2/3 (4/5)1)

0/1

S85

S41

3/51)

S85 CB

S42

0/1

2/3 (4/5)1)

S85

0,2

S41

HeES ≥

SiES

≥S51

0,1(3/4)1)

tSHES

≥

bLb

bLS

bLPS

PAU

+yBL

-yBL

tSH 3)

0/1

≥

2/3 (4/5)1)

S85

0/1

≥

2/3 (4/5)1)

S85

0/1

SES

SiDI

bLbDI

bLSDI

bLPSDI

PDI

NDI

tSDI

+yBLDI

-yBLDI

tSHDI 3)

HeDI

CBES

RC=Int∧CB

not for S1 = 4

Control

unit/process-

display

≥

0/1/2/41)

≥

RB =Int

--1

1) as of software version --A5

2) as of software version --B3

3) as of software version --B5

4) as of software version --C1

bLbES 2)

IntES

S85

Cgn

S84

0/1

Figure 3-3 Linking the digital inputs DI1 to DI7 with the control signals via the SES (S41, S42, S51, S85)

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.3 Digital input signal processing (S23 to S41)

Manual

54 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DFunctional explanation of the control signals

CB Computer-standby

Depending on the controller type this digital signal together with the

Internal/External key effects either switching in the setpoint range or

DDC-operation begins. Central computer-fail-line in SPC and DDC-operation.

He Manual external

This signal blocks the output of the controller and enables direct manual

adjustment of the manipulated variable on the front control panel.

NTracking

With this signal the output of the K-controller and the three-position-stepper

controller with external position feedback is tracked to the tracking signal y N.

Si Safety operation

In K-controllers and three-position-stepper controllers with external position

feedback, the manipulated variable adopts the parameterized safety value. In

three-position-stepper controllers with internal feedback the manipulated

variable runs independently of the safety setting value to a defined limit

position.

bLS Blocking structuring

The whole configuration is blocked with the exception of the online

parameterization level.

bLPS Blocking parameterization and structuring

The entire configuring of the instrument is blocked, this means the

parameterization as well. Only the normal process operation according to the

preselected controller type is permitted.

bLb Blocking operation

This signal blocks the entire front panel operation of the instrument.

PP-Operation controller

With this signal the controller is switched to P-operation.

tS setpoint ramp

The set setpoint ramp time can be made ineffective with this signal

(tS = High ≙ramp switched off).

tSH setpoint hold (setpoint ramp)

The setpoint change is stopped with this signal. The setpoint change continues

when the signal is reset.

yBL Direction-dependent blocking of the manipulated variable

Direction-dependent limiting of the manipulated variable by external signals,

e.g. from the limit switches of the actuating drives. This limiting is effective in

every operating mode.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 55

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

3.4.1 General, recurrent functions

DManual setpoint preset wi or nominal ratio preset wvi on the control front panel.

The internal setpoint can always be adjusted with the ±Δw-keys (14, 15) when the green

internal-LED (1) lights up. The adjusting facility is marked by ↗in the tables. Exceptions to

this rule are expressly mentioned in the individual controller types. The adjustment operates

incrementally, in the first step with a resolution of 1 digit and then an adjustment progression

so that major changes can also be performed quickly. After every interruption in the adjust-

ment by releasing the keys, the progression starts again with the smallest adjustment step.

DSetpoint preset wi or nominal ratio preset wvi by the SES

Every time the internal setpoint can be adjusted by the keys (7, 8) on the control front panel,

it is also possible to make a preset with the SES. Since only absolute and not incremental

adjustment is possible with the SES, it is advisable to use the setpoint ramp tS to avoid

steps.

In addition, the control signal Int, the automatic-manual switching and the manual manipu-

lated variable adjustment can be set via the SES. This makes a complete, parallel process

operation via the SES possible (see also chapter 3.6, page 94 ).

DSource for the external setpoint (S85)

The external setpoint w Emay come from two different sources depending on the controller

type.

External setpoint as an absolute value via the analog inputs (wEA) S85 =0, 1, (4, 5)1) or

external setpoint as an absolute value via the SES (wES)S85=2,3

DSetpoint ramp tS

With the parameter tS (oFPA), the adjustment speed of the active setpoint w (in the ratio

controller S1 = 3 the active nominal ratio) can be set over 0 to 100 %. At tS = oFF the ad-

justment speed moves towards 1. With the control signal tS = 1 the set setpoint ramp is

switched off (the setpoint then changes suddenly).

With the setpoint ramp, sudden setpoint switchings to the untracked variables SH, wi, wES at

S45=1andw

EA,can be avoided.

1) as of software version –A5

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

56 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

safe

Setpoint

external

Setpoint

Δw

tw=

tan α=100 %

Δw

Δw·tS

100 %

Figure 3-4 Setpoint switching with ramp

The setpoint change/setpoint ramp can be stopped with the control signal tSH. The setpoint

change continues when the signal is reset.

DSetpoint limits SA, SE

With the parameters SA and SE (oFPA) the effective setpoint w can be limited to minimum

value (SA) and maximum value (SE) in the range from -10 to 110 %.

Exception: Ratio controller (S1 = 3)

DTracking of the ineffective setpoint to the active setpoint (S45)

Normally the ineffective setpoint is tracked to the effective setpoint so that the setpoint

switching is bumpless. The internal setpoint (wi) and the external setpoint can be tracked via

the SES (wES). The safety setpoint SH cannot be tracked.

The external setpoint wEA through the analog inputs is only indirectly trackable by tracking

the feeding instrument to the internal setpoint.

At S45 = 1 the tracking is suppressed. This switch setting is always required especially in

follow-up controllers if the internal setpoint represents a kind of safety function or if multiple

setpoint operation is to be run in the fixed setpoint controller (S1 = 0).

Dx-tracking (S43)

With the structure switch S43 = 1, x-tracking (ratio controller xv-tracking) can be switched

on. This means that the setpoint is tracked to the actual value or the nominal ratio is tracked

to the actual ratio and therefore a control difference xd is reset to 0. The tracking always

takes place when there is no automatic operation (A). This is the case in manual mode (H),

tracking mode (N), DDC-mode and in operation with safety manipulated variable (Si):

A=H∨N∨Si

x-tracking in direction-dependent blocking operation is not possible because the P-step pro-

duced by resetting the driving control error to blocking direction would immediately cancel

the blocking.

x-tracking takes place without the set setpoint ramp tS. By tracking the setpoint to the actual

value (nominal ratio to actual ratio), the control difference xd = 0 and automatic operation

starts absolutely bumplessly. Since it can normally be assumed that, especially in manual

operation and in DDC-operation, the actual value has been driven to the desired value dur-

ing manual- or DDC-operation, the tracked setpoint then corresponds to the rated value.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 57

x-tracking only takes full effect if the tracking of the inactive setpoint is locked onto the active

setpoint (S45 = 0) so that not only the active setpoint w but also the setpoint source which is

supplying after switching to automatic operation is tracked.

At S45 = 1 (without tracking) the control difference during the A-operation is 0 but the old,

untracked setpoint becomes effective again after switching to automatic operation. With the

setpoint ramp tS this step-shaped setpoint change takes place via a time ramp.

This combination is always useful when it is not guaranteed during A-operation (especially

in safety mode) that the actual value will be driven to the desired rated value by the actuat-

ing manipulation and the tracking variable would not be correct in full x-tracking.

DConstants c1 to c7

Linking of the process variables with the constants is possible depending on the controller

type, whereby the constants c1 to c3 are used for the control variable links, the constants c4

and c5 for the command variable links.

The constants are set in the parameterization mode onPA.

The constant c6 serves for proportioning the disturbance variable connection z to the con-

troller output ya (see figure 3-7, page 62). It can be set in the parameterization mode onPA.

The constant c7 is used in P-controller operation as a factor for increasing the Kp-value.

(P/PI-switchover, see figure 3-21, page 92).

DControl signals for the setpoint switching

If available in the single controller types, the setpoint switching takes place depending on the

control signals Int (Internal/External key) and CB (Computer standby) as an AND-function

RC = Int∧CB and its negation. The status of the control signal CB and the Internal key (16)

is indicated by the C LED (18) and the Internal LED (17).

With S42 the Internal/External key (16) can be set out of function and can block in the posi-

tions Internal or External (see figure 3-3, page 53 ). The factory setting is S42 = 0 (only In-

ternal).

With S23, the CB-signal can be set to Low or High or assigned to a digital input, (see fig-

ure 3-2, page 52). The factory setting is S23 = 8, CB = High.

The setpoint switching can be varied freely with these structuring possibilities.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

58 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DActual value- and setpoint display

A red and a gree analog display with 1.7 % resolution are arranged on the front module. The

green display is assigned to the setpoint, the red display to the actual value. A red, 4-digit

digital display is used for displaying both the setpoint- and the actual value. Since only one

display is available, the displayed variable is switched using the key (6). The scope of the

display is controlled by the structure switch S81. The type of displayed variable is identified

by the signal lamps (4) and (5).

The two analog displays always indicate the active setpoint and the current actual value.

The difference between the two displays is the control difference xd or the control error

xw = --xd. The digital actual value-setpoint display also displays the current actual value/set-

point except in the ratio controllers (ratio controller actual ratio/setpoint ratio). The digital

display shows the setpoint before the setpoint ramp (ratio controller: nominal ratio after the

setpoint ramp).

The following symbols are used in the block diagrams below to simplify the representation:

Display type digital display

↗analog display

0000

I... IV

0000

Display range ad

ustable with dP, d

,dE

Display levels of the digital display

displayed variables x, w, xv or wv

DDisplay range

The digital display for x or w is a four-digit 7-segment display. The display range for the

x-and w-display is set together with the parameter dP (decimal point), dA (start value) and

dE (end value) in the structuring mode oFPA.

With dA the numeric value is set which is to be displayed at arithmetic value 0 (correspond-

ing to 0 % display in the analog displays). With dE the numeric value is set which is to be

displayed at arithmetic value 1 (corresponding to 100 % display in the analog displays). With

dP the decimal point is set as a fixed point. If the start value is set less than the end value,

an increasing display is given with increasing arithmetic values and vice versa. The number

range for the start- and end value respectively is from -1999 to 9999, outside these ranges,

--oFL and oFL is displayed in the case of overmodulation in the process operation level. The

factory setting is 0.0 to 100.0 %.

With the refresh rate parameter dr (onPA) the digital displays can be settled down in the

case of restless process variables. Non-linear process variables can be represented physi-

cally correctly by the linearization.

The display range set with dP, dA and dE is transferred depending on the controller type

(S1) to the parameters and setpoints which can be assigned to the displayed variable:

With the appropriate assignment, this also applies for the limit value alarms A1 to A4, see

chapter 3.10.3, page 117.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 59

The analog displays have a fixed display range of 0 to 100 %. The overshoot or undershoot

is displayed by the flashing 100 % or 0 %-LED. This is displayed by one or two, alternately lit

LEDs. The centre point of the light field represents the ”pointer”. This display technique

doubles the resolution. If a falling characteristic (dE<dA) is set for the digital displays, the

analog displays are switched in direction of effect except for in the ratio controllers.

y-display

A 2-digit red digital display is available for the y-display additionally. The corresponding ad-

justment keys and status-LEDs are allocated to each other in color and space (see also

chapter 3.6, page 94 ).

3.4.2 Fixed setpoint controller with 2 independent setpoints (S1 = 0)

ya+c6 Sz

PID

wi2

wi1

INT∧CB

x=x1+c1S(x2 -c2Sx3+c3)

0000

Figure 3-5 Control principle S1 = 0

This controller type can be used as a fixed setpoint controller with 2 independent setpoints

(two batch mode) or as a fixed setpoint controller with 1 setpoint, by blocking the Internal/Ex-

ternal-switching (factory setting). By linking the inputs x1, x2, x3 with the constants c1, c2,

c3 it can be used as a one-, two- or three-component controller.

Switching between the two setpoints which can be set separately on the front panel takes

place dependent on the control signals Int and CB according to table 3-1, page 60. Signaling

of the active setpoint takes place on the LEDs Internal and C. As soon as a LED lights, wi2

is active.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

60 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Control commands Alarm signals Active w

Digital inputs Front Front LED Digital outputs at S43= Explanations

H∨N∨Si CB internal internal CRB RC 01

01000 00 wi1wi1(n)

1) switchover switchover

00001 01 wi2wi2(n)with CB, Int=0 with Int,CB=1

01110 11

2) wi2 wi2 (n)

00111 11 wi2wi2(n)

11000 00 wi1x switchover switchover

10001 01 wi2x with CB,Int=0 with Int,CB=1

11110 11

2) wi2 x

10111 11 wi2x

1) tracking takes place at S45 = 0 and S43 = 1 to the control variable x, the tracking does not apply for switchover

wi1/wi2 at S45 = 1 automatic mode starts with wi=x (xd=0), the active setpoint runs to the old set value via the

possibly set setpoint ramp tS

2) Factory setting fixed setpoint controller with 1 setpoint (S42 = 0: only Internal, Int = 1, S23 = 8: CB = 1) RB =Int

RC = Int∨CB

Factory setting

Table 3-1 Switching between wi1 and wi2

With the Shift key (6) the digital x/w-display can be switched between the display levels Ito

IV depending on the position of S81.

In display level II the active w can be displayed, in display level III the main control variable

x1. The inactive setpoint is displayed in the display level IV . The displayed active or inactive

setpoint can also be adjusted (see table 3-2).

The active setpoint- and actual value is displayed on the analog displays.

Structure

switches Posi-

tion Function

S81 Switching the w/x-digital display

Display order

III III IV

[0] x/xv w/wv -- --

1x/xv w/wv x1/xv --

2x/xv w/wi1/wv -- wE/wvE/wi2

3x/xv w/wi1/wv x1/xv wE/wvE/wi2

4x/xv -- -- --

5-- w/wv -- --

6-- -- x1/xv --

7xv wv x1 w

Identification of the displayed variables by the w- or x-signal lamp:

1 = steady light, 0.5 = flashing light, 0 = off

Display order

III III IV

1 0 0.5 (0 at S81=6) 0x-signal lamp

0 1 0 0,5 w-signal lamp

Table 3-2 Display levels (S81)

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 61

S45

Int∧CB

S85

2/3/(4/5)1)

0/1

c1, c2, c3

S15

S16

S17

Factory setting

c1=c2=c3=0

x=x1+c1 ·(x2 - c2 ·x3+c3)

SA,SE

wi1

S43

Adaptation

SES

wi1ES

Int∧CB

A=H∨N∨Si

IV II

0000 0000

H=Hi∨He

III

0000 0000

wi1/wi2

S85

2/3/(4/5)1)

0/1

wi2

wi2ES

wfig.

3-27,

page

104

Note: S51=4 is recommended for this controller

1) as of software version --A5

fig. 3-1,

page 49

fig.

3-19,

page

tS tSH

Figure 3-6 Block diagram S1 = 0, fixed setpoint controller with 2 independent setpoints

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

62 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

3.4.3 Slave controller, synchronized controller, SPC-controller

with Int/Ext-swtiching (S1 = 1)

SES

wE=c4 ·we+c5

wES

x3/wEA

PID ya+c6 ·z

0000

x1 x=x1+c1 ·x2+c3

tS y

Int∧CB

Figure 3-7 Control principle S1 = 1

In this controller type you can switch between the internal setpoint wi and the external set-

point wEdepending on the control signals CB and the Internal-/External key (16) (see

table 3-4, page 65 and table 3-5, page 66).

The external setpoint can be set via the analog input wEA or via the SES (wES) (selection by

S85).

This controller type is used for cascade controls with 2 separate controllers (master- and

slave controllers), for synchronized controls, fixed setpoint controls with external setpoint

preset under console conditions with external setpoint generator and SPC-controls (setpoint

control).

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 63

DSPC-controls

Here a process computer takes over command of the setpoint during computer operation

RC = Int∧CB = 1. In the case of computer failure (CB from 1 !0) the controller takes over

either the last computer setpoint (tracked wi) or the safety setpoint SH (selection via S44).

DCascade controls

A command controller, e.g. a fixed setpoint controller (with the main controlled variable)

feeds the external setpoint of a slave controller with its manipulated variable (with the auxili-

ary controlled variable) and this the final control element. This gives faster control of the

main controlled variable in the event of changes in the auxiliary controlled variable, e.g. fur-

nace temperature control (furnace temperature, main controlled variable) with different flow

of the medium to be heated (auxiliary controlled variable).

DSlave controls

A command controller feeds several synchronized controllers simultaneously whose individ-

ual setpoints can be set in a ratio to each other by the constants c4 and c5 and then drag

the controlled variables accordingly (controlled variable synchronization).

DControl signals for the setpoint switching

The setpoint switching takes place via the logic link RC = Int∧CB and its negation (see table

3-4, page 65 and table 3-5, page 66). Both control signals can be set statically to 1 or 0 (int

via S49, CB via S24) in addition to their normal functions as Shift key or control signal with

the states 1 and 0, see fig. 3-2, page 52 and fig. 3-3, page 53.

The factory setting is Int = 1 (S42 = 0) and CB=1 (S23 = 8), so that the internal setpoint

wi is always active and cannot be switched in the factory setting

With this setting option it is possible to make the setting only dependent on Int (S42=2,

S23= 8) or only dependent on CB (S42=1, S23=1 to 7) as a slave controller with Internal/Exter-

nal-switching. If the switching option is blocked in External position (S42=1, S23=8), the con-

troller operates as a slave controller without Internal/External-switching.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

64 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DDisplay of the external setpoint wE

With the Shift key (6) the digital x/w-display can be switched between the display levels Ito

IV depending on the position of S81.

In display level II the active w can be displayed, in display level III the main control variable

x1. The external setpoint wEis displayed in display level IV. The displayed active or inactive

setpoint can also be adjusted (see table 3-3).

The active setpoint- and actual value are displayed on the analog displays.

Structure

switches

Posi-

tion

Function

S81 Switching the w/x-digital display

Display order

III III IV

[0] x/xv w/wv -- --

1x/xv w/wv x1/xv --

2x/xv w/wi1/wv -- wE/wvE/wi2

3x/xv w/wi1/wv x1/xv wE/wvE/wi2

4x/xv -- -- --

5-- w/wv -- --

6-- -- x1/xv --

7xv wv x1 w

Identification of the displayed variables by the w- or x-signal lamp:

1 = steady light, 0.5 = flashing light, 0 = off

Display order

III III IV

1 0 0.5 (0 at S81=6) 0x-signal lamp

0 1 0 0,5 w-signal lamp

Table 3-3 Display levels (S81)

DOperation with 2 or 3 setpoints

If tracking of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint is blocked with S45 = 1, a multiple

setpoint operation (switching between wi, wEand SH is achieved (see table 3-4, page 65)

and table 3-5, page 66.

DControlled variable processing

A 2-component control is implemented (disturbance variable connection). With factors c1

and c3 the main controlled variable x1 can connect the auxiliary controlled variable x2 with

weighting.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 65

Control signals Message signals

Digital

inputs Front Front Digital

outputs

active w at

Com-

pu-

∨N

∨Si

In-

ter-

nal

In-

ter-

nal

LED

4) S43=0

S44=0

S43=1

S44=0

S43=0

S44=1

S43=1

S44=1

Explanations ter-

fai-

lure

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 wE(n)2) wE(n)2) Automatic mode,

SPC-mode

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 wi(n,↗)

SH3)

wi(n,↗)

Automatic mode,

computer switched off,

computer in

SPC-standby

0 1 1 1 0 1 1 wi(n,↗)wi(n,↗)

Automatic mode,

computer on standby,

controller not in

SPC-standby 5)

0 0 1 1 1 1 1 wi(n,↗)wi(n,↗)

Automatic mode,

computer switched off,

computer in SPC-

standby

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 wE

(n)2) xwE

(n)2) x

1 0 0 0 1 0 1 wi

(n,↗)x

SH3)

(n,↗)

Manual-, tracking- or

safety mode 5)

1 1 1 1 0 1 1 wi

(n,↗)xwi

(n,↗)x

1 0 1 1 1 1 1 wi

(n,↗)xwi

(n,↗)x

1) The table is shown for static CB-switching without acknowledgement (S41 = 0).

2) Source for wEat S85 = 0, 1, (4, 5 as of software version -A5) is wEA or at S85 = 2, 3 wES (SES). The external setpoint

fed in through the SES (w ES) is tracked. Tracking is not possible when the external setpoint is fed in via wEA.

3) SH can only be reached after wE, if Int = 0 and CB goes from 1 →0 (computer failure). If CB = 0 and Int is switched

from 1 →0, wi is still active. Since SH is not tracked, switching over to SH can take place with the setpoint ramp tS.

4) By OR-linking with the digital outputs H, N and the control signal Si no computer standby or computer operation can be

signaled in manual-, tracking- or safety operation.

5) Factory setting

(n) tracked to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching

↗adjustable

Factory setting

Table 3-4 Slave-/synchronized-/SPC-controller with Internal-/External switching S1 = 1 with tracking of

the inactive setpoint to the active S45 = 0

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

66 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Control signals Message signals

Digital

inputs Front Front Digital

outputs

active w at

∨N

∨Si

Inter-

nal

In-

ter-

nal

LED

4) S43=0

S44=0

S43=1

S44=0

S43=0

S44=1

S43=1

S44=1

Explanations

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 wE2) wE2)

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 wi(↗)

SH3)

wi(↗)Automatic mode 5)

0 1 1 1 0 1 1 wi(↗)wi(↗)

0 0 1 1 1 1 1 wi(↗)wi,↗)

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 wE2) x wE2) x

1 0 0 0 1 0 1 wi(↗) x

SH3)

wi(↗)xManual-, tracking- or safety

mode 5)

1 1 1 1 0 1 1 wi(↗) x wi(↗) x

1 0 1 1 1 1 1 wi(↗) x wi(↗) x

1) The table is shown for static computer switching without acknowledgement (S41 = 0).

2) Source for wEat S85 = 1, 2, (4, 5 as of software version -A5) is wEA or at S85 = 3, 4 wES. Switching between the set-

points can take place with the setpoint ramp tS.

3) SH can only be reached after wE, if Int = 0 and CB goes from 1 →0 (computer failure). If CB = 0 and Int is switched

from 1 →0, wi is still active. Since SH is not tracked, switching over to SH can take place with the setpoint ramp tS.

4) By OR-linking with the digital outputs H, N and the control signal Si no computer standby or computer operation can be

signaled in manual-, tracking- or safety operation.

5) Factory setting

↗adjustable

Factory setting

Table 3-5 Slave-/synchronized-/SPC controller with Internal-/External switching (SPC-controller), S1 =

1 without tracking of the active setpoint to the active setpoint S45 = 1, 2 or 3 setpoint oper-

ation

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 67

Factory setting

c1=c3=0

S85

wES

2/3

CB A

Int

wi wE

SA, SE

c1, c3

tFI

x3/wEA

S43

S44

S45

Adaptation

x=x1+c1 · x2+c3

wES

w-c3

c4 SH

wE=c4·wE+c5

c4, c5

Factory setting

c4 = 1, c5 = 0

wi1

S85

wi1ES

SES 2/3/(4/5)1)

0/1

S17,

S15,

S16,

0/1/(4/5)1)

0000

III

xx1

0000

A=H∨N∨Si

H=Hi∨He

Note: S51 = 4 is recommended for this controller

1) as of software version -A5

Figure

3-27,

page

104

Figure 3-1,

page 49

Figure

3-19,

page

tS tSH

Figure 3-8 Block diagram S1 = 1 slave controller, synchronized controller, SPC-controller

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

68 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

3.4.4 DDC-Fixed setpoint controller (S1 = 2)

The DDC-controller has the job of taking over the control circuit as bumpless as possible in the

case of a computer failure. During DDC operation- the process computer takes over the control

function, the computer is in stand-by-mode and is tracked to the computer manipulated vari-

able. If necessary the control difference is set to zero by x-tracking for absolutely bumpless

switching.

In K-controller circuits, the actuating current can be output parallel by the computer periphery to

achieve full redundancy. In this case the actuating current of the K-controller is switched off dur-

ing computer operation (S52 = 1). If the actuating current of the computer is also to be switched

off during controller operation, the two currents simply need to be added by OR-diodes. This

OR-diode is integrated in the current outputs of the SIPART-controllers.

If the U/I-converter of the K-controller is to be used during computer operation to feed the final

control element, the actuating current cutoff must be cancelled (S52 = 0).

The DDC-mode corresponds to tracking mode of the other controller types with the difference

that the switching to tracking mode takes place not via the control signal N but as a function of

the control signal CB and the Internal/External key:

DDC-mode ≙RC = Int∧CB = 1

PID

x=x1+c1 · (x2 - c2 · x3+c3)

0000

ya+c6 · z

x - TRACKING

yES

SES

Int∧CB

Figure 3-9 Control principle S1 = 2

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 69

The DDC-mode is signaled like the tracking mode in the other controller types by the lit y-Exter-

nal-LED. The status of the control signal CB and the Internal/External key is displayed by the

LEDs Cand Internal. During the DDC-mode the setpoint is prepared by tracking to the com-

puter failure. The setpoint is always displayed which would become active after the computer

failure.

With S50 a choice is made between x-tracking and wi, with S44 the safety setpoint is preset.

With S49 the priority between DDC-mode and manual mode is determined. If DDC-mode has

priority over manual mode, you can select with the manual-automatic switching whether

operation is to continue after a computer failure in automatic- or manual mode. If you need to

intervene manually in computer operation, you have to switch to Internal-mode in addition to

switching over to manual mode, then the LEDs Internal (17) and Manual (12) light up, the LED

y-External (13) goes out, the non-lit LED C (18) still indicates computer standby.

If manual mode has priority over DDC-mode you can switch directly from computer operation to

manual operation. Then the Manual LED (12) lights, the y-External LED (13) goes out, the dark

LEDs Internal (17) and C (18) still indicate computer standby of the controller or computer

standby.

Automatic mode is always switched to here in the event of a computer failure.

DDDC-control unit

The DDC-control unit function is obtained with S49 = 0 and with S51 = 2 (manual mode

only). In computer operation the manipulated variable is fed through y N, manual operation is

always active after a computer failure. If you want to switch over to manual operation during

computer operation, the computer operation must be switched off with the Internal key (16).

The actual value can be indicated on the actual value display.

SH as a flag pointer or wi can be indicated on the setpoint display.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

70 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Footnote explanation, see page 72

Table 3-6 DDC controller, S1 = 2, manual operation has priority over DDC operation S49 = 1

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 71

Footnote explanation, see page 72

Table 3-7 DDC controller, S1 = 2, manual operation has priority over DDC operation S49 = 1

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

72 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Notestotable3-9andtable3-7

1) Manual operation can be achieved by:

Control signals Message signals

Digital input He Front Hi Front Manual LED Digital output H

0,9 6)

Table 3-8 Generation of the control signal H = Hi∨He

2) In DDC-operation the setting current is switched off at S52 = 1. Source for yEat S85 = 0,

1,(4, 5 as of software version --A05), y isN.AtS85=2,3,yacts

ES (SES). The external

manipulated variable fed in through the SES (y ES) is tracked. When feeding in via yNthe

feeding instrument must be tracked.

3) The table is shown for static computer switching without acknowledgement, S41 = 0.

4) By OR-linking of the digital output H with the control signal Si no computer standby or

computer operation can be signaled in manual -- or safety mode.

5) 0.5 = Flashing rhythm 1 : 1

6) 0.9 = Flashing rhythm 0.1 off, 0.9 on

(↗) = adjustable

(n) = is followed up to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching

The control signal Track (N) has no function in DDC-controllers. The tables apply for S45 = 0

(with tracking of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint). At S45 = 1 (without tracking) and

x-tracking, automatic operation starts with wi = x (xd = 0), the active setpoint runs to the old set

value wi via the possibly set setpoint ramp tS.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 73

DDisplay levels

With the Shift key (6) the digital x/w-display can be switched between the display levels Ito

IV depending on the position of S81.

In display level II the active w can be displayed, in display level III the main control variable

x1. The inactive setpoint is displayed in the display level IV. The displayed active or inactive

setpoint can also be adjusted (see table 3-9).

The active setpoint- and actual value is displayed on the analog displays.

Structure

switches

Posi-

tion

Function

S81 Switching the w/x-digital display

Display order

III III IV

[0] x/xv w/wv -- --

1x/xv w/wv x1/xv --

2x/xv w/wi1/wv -- wE/wvE/wi2

3x/xv w/wi1/wv x1/xv wE/wvE/wi2

4x/xv -- -- --

5-- w/wv -- --

6-- -- x1/xv --

7xv wv x1 w

Identification of the displayed variables by the w- or x-signal lamp:

1 = steady light, 0.5 = flashing light, 0 = off

Display order

III III IV

1 0 0.5 (0 at S81=6) 0x-signal lamp

0 1 0 0,5 w-signal lamp

Table 3-9 Display levels (S81)

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

74 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

X1 X

S44

S45

S43

Int

c1, c2, c3

Factory setting

c1=c2=c3=0

x=x1+c1·(x2-c2·x3+c3)

Adaptation

CB SA,SE tS

0S49

III

wi1

S85

wi1ES

SES 2/3/(4/5)1)

0/1

Note: S52 = 4 is recommended for this controller

1) as of software --A5

S17, x3/wvEA

S16, x2

S15, x1

Int

00000000

0000

II/IV

fig.

3-27,

page

104

fig. 3-1,

page 49

Fig.

3-19,

page

HSi

tS tSH

Figure 3-10 Block diagram S1 = 2, DDC fixed setpoint controller

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 75

3.4.5 Controlled ratio controller (S1 = 3)

wVES

wVEA

vis=x1 - c5

x2 ya

PID ya+c6 ·z

0000

w=v ·x2+c5

wvi

SES

v = vA to vE

v=wv·(vE - vA)+vA

Int∧CB

Figure 3-11 Control principle S1 = 3

In a ratio control the commanding process variable x2 is weighted with the adjustable ratio

factor and a basic value c5 added if necessary. The result forms the setpoint w for the following

controlled process variable x1.

w = v · x2 + c5

With xd = w - x1 the result is xd = v · x2 + c5 - x1

In the controlled state (xd = 0) the result is v= x1 -- c5

x2 , i.e. in the controlled state and at

c5 = 0 x1

x2 behaves according to the set ratio factor v.

A typical application are combustion rules where a fuel volume x1 belongs to every air volume

x2 to guarantee optimum combustion.

The ratio factor range v = vA to vE is determined with the parameters vA and vE in the structur-

ing mode oFPA in the range from 0.0 to 9.999 (factory setting vA = 0, vE = 1). In addition a

basic value c5 (parameterization mode onPA) can be connected in the range from --1.999 to

9.999 (factory setting = 0.0).

The standardized nominal ratio wv (wvi or wvE) in the range from 0 to 1 is converted to the ratio

factor range.

v = wv (vE - vA) + vA

With w = v · x2 + c5 the result is w = [wv (vE - vA) + vA] x2 + c5

In the ratio controller the standardized nominal ratio wv and the standardized actual ratio xv are

displayed on the digital x/w-displays respectively in display levels I and II. A physical display is

possible with dA, dE, dP. The controlled variable x1 and the evaluated commanding process

variable w are displayed on the analog x - and w-displays respectively so that a direct control

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

76 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

difference monitoring is possible at all times. At S81 = 7, x1 and w can be displayed on the

digital x/w-display in the levels III and IV. A physical display is possible with Pd, Ad, Ed.

At S81 = 2 or 3, the digital x/w-display can be switched to the external nominal ratio wvE

(display level IV). The digital x/w-display indicates the actual ratio xy in display levels I and III.

Switching between wvi and wvEtakes place in the same way as in the slave controller

S1 = 1.

The actual ratio is gained by back calculating the ratio formula with the current process vari-

ables x1, x2:

vis =x1-c5

with vist = xv (vE -- vA) + vA the result is for xv = vis-vA

vE-vA or xv = vE-vA

x1-c5

x2 -vA

xv is displayed and is required for x-tracking-mode. For the xv-display, x1 and x2 are limited to

+0.5 % so that the display does not become too restless for small x1 and x2 or flip from positive

to negative in the case of negative x2. The linearization of the commanding process variable x2

or the following process variable x1 is possible (S21).

The linearization then acts on the analog displays and the ratio formation and therefore in-

directly on the digital displays for nominal- and actual ratio. The ratio controller has no nominal

ratio limiting because the ratio factor range already marks the limit.

With the Shift key (6) the digital x/w-display can be switched between the display levels I to IV

depending on the position of S81.

In display level II the active nominal ratio wy can be displayed, in dispaly level I/III the actual

ratio xy. The external setpoint wyEis displayed in display level IV. The displayed active or exter-

nal nominal ratio can also be adjusted.

The active setpoint- and actual value is displayed on the analog displays (see table 3-10).

Structure

switches

Posi-

tion

Function

S81 Switching the w/x-digital display

Display order

III III IV

[0] x/xv w/wv -- --

1x/xv w/wv x1/xv --

2x/xv w/wi1/wv -- wE/wvE/wi2

3x/xv w/wi1/wv x1/xv wE/wvE/wi2

4x/xv -- -- --

5-- w/wv -- --

6-- -- x1/xv --

7xv wv x1 w

Identification of the displayed variables by the w- or x-signal lamp:

1 = steady light, 0.5 = flashing light, 0 = off

Display order

III III IV

1 0 0.5 (0 at S81=6) 0x-signal lamp

0 1 0 0,5 w-signal lamp

Table 3-10 Display levels (S81)

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 77

wvi

Adaptation

S85

xv =

S43

S45

S44 Int

wv xv

Factory setting

vA=0, vE=1, c5=0

SH vA, vE, c5

IV II I/III

w=v · x2+c5

vis=x1 - c5

v=vA to vE

v=wv (vE - vA)+vA

2,3 Vis-vA

vE-vA

S17,

x3/wvEA

S16, x2

S15, x1

1) as of software version --A5

2) as of software version –A9

SES

wvi

0/1/(4/5)1)

wVES

wiES

S85

0,1

2/3(4/5)1)

IV 2)

III 2)

S81 = 7

wVES

A=H∨N∨Si

H=Hi∨He

0000 0000 00000000 0000

wVE

fig.

3-27,

page

104

fig. 3-1,

page 49

fig. 3-19,

page 89

Int

tS tSH

Figure 3-12 Block diagram S1 = 3 controlled ratio controller

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

78 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

The ratio controller behaves like the slave controller S1 = 1 with respect to switching of the set-

point ratio wv so that the information and tables there apply accordingly. The variables wi and

wEmust be replaced by wvi and wvE. This controller type can also be used as a ratio controller

with fixed ratio (manually adjustable) or with commanded ratio factor.

A fixed ratio factor is used for example in simple combustion rules, (see example) where the

ratio factor is reset manually if necessary for varying fuels. If it is possible to measure the

effects of the ratio factor (combustion quality, pollutants in the flue gas) a commanded ratio

controller is used. Here a master controller adjusts the ratio factor (ratio cascade) with the

combustion quality as a control variable.

Another application for ratio cascades are concentration controls, e.g. pH-value-controls. The

pH-value is the controlled variable of the command controller, the flow of alkali and acid the

commanded process variable and the following (controlled) process variable of the ratio

controller.

DExample of a ratio control

GAS

c

AIR

Figure 3-13 Control diagram ratio control

In a combustion control the air-/gas flow should be in a constant ratio. The command vari-

able (commanding process variable) is the air flow QLwhichispresetintherange0to

12000 m3/h as a signal 4 to 20 mA. The controlled variable (following process variable) is

the gas flow QGwith a measuring range 0 to 3000 m3/hwhichisalsoavailableasa4to

20 mA signal. In an ideal combustion the air-/gas ratio is

Lideal ==4.

⋅λ

QGThe air factor λis then 1 and should be adjustable in the range from

0.75 to 1.25 on the controller.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 79

The ratio factor v (at xd = 0) is determined partly by the transmission factors K of the

transmitters (measuring ranges).

x1=Q

G⋅KGwith the values from the example 100 %

3000 m3/h

KG=

x2=Q

L⋅KL100 %

12,000 m3/h

KL=

v= = QG

x2⋅with QG

L⋅λ

v= 1

L⋅λ

⋅

With the values from the example

v= 1

λ⋅1

100 % ⋅h⋅12,000 m3

3,000 m3⋅100 % ⋅h

⋅

the result is v= 1

λi.e. the choice of the transmitter ranges has been made so

that

KL=1

L

corresponds to

The desired adjustment range of λgives:

vA = =

25 =0,8 vE = =

0,75 = 1,333

vA and vE are set in the structuring mode oFPA. By setting the nominal ratio wv from 0 to 1

the ratio factor v can now be adjusted from 0.8 to 1.33 or the air factor λfrom 1.25 to 0.75.

0.75

1.2

1.25 0.8

0.9

1.1

1.2

0.2 0.6

1.33

1.3

0.80.40

0.8

1.1

0.9

Figure 3-14 Relationship ratio factor v and air factor λto standardized nominal ratio wv

If the combustion is also to take place at small flow volumes with excess air, the constant c

must be set negative. Figure 3-14 shows the gas-/air ratio in the controlled state at different

air factors λandc=0aswellasatλ= 1 and c <0, i.e. with excess air.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

80 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

1) constant gas/air-ratio

2) gas/air-ratio with additional excess air

%mA

Gas

m3/h V=1,33 λ=0.75

0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 m3/h air

V=1 λ=1

V=0.8 λ=1.25 1)

V=1, c<0 2)

4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 mA

0102030405060708090100 %

120

110

100

3500

3000

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

X1X1QG

Figure 3-15 Display of gas-/air ratio in controlled status

3.4.6 Control unit/process display (S1 = 4)

The following functions are possible in this configuration:

Process display and control unit. The configuration is identical for both applications. The input

wiring for both is illustrated in figure 3-16, page 82.

DProcess display, two-channel analog display with parallel,

switchable digital display (S85 = 0/1 and S42 = 1)

see figure 3-16, page 82

The process variables are assigned to the green analog display by w EA and to the red ana-

log display by x2.

The display range of the analog display is 0 to 100 %. The four-digit digital x/w-display is

connected in parallel to the analog displayd by the Shift key (6) to the positions I and II one

after another.

The display range of the digital display is set for both display positions together with the

parameters dA, dE, dP in the oFPA configuring mode. The linearizer (S21) which can be as-

signed to the analog input then acts on both the analog- and the digital display. If this is not

desirable, the linearizer can also be assigned to x1 by S21 = 5 and connect the same analog

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 81

input (AI1 to AI4) by S15 (x1) and S16 (x2). In this case the unlinearized process variable is

displayed in display order position II and the linearized process variable in position III.

Of course it is also possible to use the x1-display channel separately from the two analog

displays as a third display channel.

Another display channel is available with the two-digit y-display via Y R.

DProcess display, one-channel analog display with parallel,

digital display and displayed limit values

see fig. 3-16, page 82

The red analog display is fed via x2, a parallel physical digitual display is possible by assign-

ing x1 via S15 to the same analog input if the linearizer is assigned to x1 by S21 = 5 and the

display range is set by dA, dE to oFPA-mode.

Of course it is also possible to use the x1-display channel separately from the two analog

displays as a second display channel.

A third display channel is available with the two-digit y-display via yR.

Via S80 = 5/6 the limit values A1, A2 or A1 to A4 can be displayed on the green analog dis-

play with a resultion of 3 %. When assigning the limit values to the displayed process vari-

able in the red analog display, the position of the process variable to the limit values can be

read. If a limit value responds, this is signaled by the corresponding alarm lamp (20) and the

flashing alarm-LED on the green bargraph. The alarms can be labeled on the replaceable

scale (21).

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

82 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

wEA

w-c5

S45

wES

SES

2/3

c4, c5

wE=c4 ·wE+c5

SA,SE tS

+Δw

-Δw

0S55

oFF

Y1, Y2

Int

S44

0/1/(4/5)1) S85

Factory setting

c4 = 1, c5 = 0

S54

RC =CB∧INT = CB∨Int

Int

-Δw

+Δw

A1, A2

A1 ... A4

0 ... 4

S80

1) as of software --A5

&--1

0000

III I

x1 x

00000000

IV II

x1 x

fig. 3-27,

page 104

fig. 3-1,

page 49

fig. 3-19,

page 89

Figure 3-16 Block diagram control unit/process display (S1 = 4) setpoint generator S/K, manual control

station S/K

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 83

DControl units

The integrated control unit function always includes a setpoint generator and a manual

control station in the following versions:

-- trackable K-setpoint generator

-- S-setpoint generator

-- trackable K-manual control station (S2 = 0)

-- S-two-position control unit with 2 outputs (heating/cooling) (S2 = 1)

-- S-three-position manual control unit internal feedback (S2 =2)

-- S-three-position manual control unit external feedback (S2 =3)

The ability to combine setpoint generator- and manual control station type depends on the

application. Either the setpoint generator or the manual control station can use the K-output,

the remaining function must have an S-output.

- Setpoint generator see figure 3-16, page 82

S- and K-setpoint generators are installed parallel. In the S-setpoint generator, the

switching outputs ±Δw can be locked depending on the Internal key (16) and the control

signal CB, the status message is output by the signal lamps Int and C, see table 3-7,

page 71. The feedback of the setpoint adjusted incrementally by the switching outputs

takes place via the w-display (input w EA, the switching is blocked in position Ext, S42 =

1).

In the K-setpoint generator the tracking of the internal setpoint is controlled dependent on

the Internal key (16) and the control signal CB, see table 3-7, page71. The tracking vari-

able is fed in via w EA. The active setpoint is output by assignment of w to the analog out-

put AO (S56 = 2/3).

With the Shift key (6) the digital x/w-display can be switched between the display levels I

to IV depending on the position of S81. The controlled variable is displayed in the display

level I. In display level II the active w can be displayed, in display level III the controlled

variable x1. The inactive setpoint is displayed in the display level IV. The displayed active

or external setpoint can also be adjusted (see table 3-11, page 84).

The active setpoint- and actual value is displayed on the analog displays.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

84 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Structure

switches Posi-

tion Function

S81 Switching the w/x-digital display

Display order

III III IV

[0] x/xv w/wv -- --

1x/xv w/wv x1/xv --

2x/xv w/wi1/wv -- wE/wvE/wi2

3x/xv w/wi1/wv x1/xv wE/wvE/wi2

4x/xv -- -- --

5-- w/wv -- --

6-- -- x1/xv --

7xv wv x1 w

Identification of the displayed variables by the w- or x-signal lamp:

1 = steady light, 0.5 = flashing light, 0 = off

Display order

III III IV

1 0 0.5 (0 at S81=6) 0x-signal lamp

0 1 0 0,5 w-signal lamp

Table 3-11 Display levels (S81)

Control signals Message signals

Digital

in-puts Front Front Digital outputs active w at

ect o

±Δw-keys on

Int∨CB

CB1) Inter-

nal

Inter-

nal

LED

RB RC5)

S44=0 S44=1 wi ±Δw/BA

0 0 0 1 0 1 3) we(n)2) 3) we(n)2) no yes 07)

1 0 0 0 0 1 3) we(n)2) 3) we(n)2) no no 1

0 1 1 1 1 0 3) wi(n,↗)3) wi(n,↗)yes no 1

16) 16) 16) 06) 16) 16) 3) we(n)2)6) SH4)6) no6) no6) 16)

1) The table is shown for static CB-switching without acknowledgement (S41 = 0).

2) Source for wEat S85 = 0, 1, (4, 5 as of software version -A5), is wEA, which is assigned by S17 or at S85 = 2, 3 wES,

which is fed in via the SES.

3) Tracking only takes place at S45=0 and only wES and wi to the active setpoint. When feeding in via wEA the feeding

instrument must be tracked.

4) Only to be used as a flag pointer when no analog feedback is possible from the fed instrument.

5) RC = no K-setpoint generator operation, wi not adjustable.

6) Factory setting

7) wired-or-connection of Int = RB and CB supplies Int∨CB

No S-setpoint optentiometer operation, Δw-keys not active

(n) tracked to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching

↗adjustable

Table 3-12 Setpoint switching setpoint generator S/K, S1 = 4 process display/control unit

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 85

DManual control station (S2 = 0, 1, 2, 3)

see figure 3-17, page 86 and figure 3-18, page 87

The controller output structures which can be configured by S2 are used for the manual con-

trol station function whereby automatic operation is replaced by the ”Hold manipulated vari-

able” mode. All other operating modes are identical with the controller functions. The last

manipulated variable before switching to this operating mode is transferred to this hold oper-

ation and the Δy-keys are inactive. If, in this operating mode, the manipulated variable

output is to be tracked e.g. in 2-wait operation, the tracking operation must be activated by

the control signal N and the input yN.

If only manual control function without switching is desired, the instrument must be blocked

in manual mode with S51 = 2.

The following figures only show 2 examples. For the other variations, see the block diagrams

of the controller-output structures (fig. 3-22, page 96, figure 3-23, page 97 and figure 3-25,

page 100 to figure 3-28, page 105).

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

86 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

-Δy

+Δy

02, 3

S54

S55

2S51

S51

+ΔyH-ΔyH

NSi

yS>50

+yBL -yBL

+yBL

-yBL

+Δy

-Δy

S19

S57

S29 S30

GND

yS≤50

yAn

0 0 1 1 0 1 0

Block diagrams for S49 = 0 and manual control station S with ext. feedback (S2=3) see controller output structures

figure 3-27, page 104

Figure 3-17 Block diagram control unit/process display (S1 = 4) manual control station S with internal

feedback S2 = 2 (manual operation has priority over tracking S49 = 1)

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 87

S51

S54

S85

+yBL -yBL

oFF

2/3

0/1/(4/5)1)

S55

S52

tP, tM (S2 = 0)

S56

-Δy

S57

S53

1/3

0/2

tM, tA

tP, tE

+Δy

S57

1/3

0/2

S53

S18 S29 S30 S19

YAn

0/1

2/3/(4/5)1)

S85

1) as of software version --A5

2) as of software version --B2

yES

yHES

SES

12/13

10/11

0/1 S56

Block diagram for S49 = 0, see controller output structures figure 3-28, page 105

Figure 3-18 Block diagram control unit/process display (S1 = 4) manual control station with K-output

S2 = 0/two-position output S2 = 1 (manual operation has priority over tracking S49 = 1)

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

88 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Control signals Message signals

Digital inputs Front Front Digital outputs

±yBL Si NHi7) Hi8) H

LED

y-Ext.

LED

HNw

000000000 ya(n) Hold operation

000100,94) 0 1 0 yH(n,↗)Manual mode

000011010 yH(n,↗)Manual mode

000111010 yH(n,↗)Manual mode

001000101 yE(n)1) Tracking operation

001100,55) 1 1 1 yE(n) Tracking operation

001010,55) 1 1 1 yE(n) Tracking operation

001110,55) 1 1 1 yE(n) Tracking operation

1 0 0,55)6) 1 0 ±yBL2) ±Blocking operation

1 1 as above 0,55)6) 1as

0±yBL2) ±Blocking operation

0 1

0,55)6) 1a

ove 0 yS3) Safety operation

Table 3-13 Output switching manual control station S/K (S1 = 4)

Tracking operation has priority over manual operation (S49 = 0)

Control signals Message signals

Digital inputs Front Front Digital outputs

±yBL Si NHi7) Hi8) H

LED

y-Ext.

LED

HNw

000000000 ya(n) Hold operation

000100,94) 0 1 0 yH(n,↗)Manual mode

000011010 yH(n,↗)Manual mode

000111010 yH(n,↗)Manual mode

001000101 yE(n)1) Tracking operation

001100,94) 0,5 1 1 yH(n,↗)Manual mode

0010110,55) 1 1 yH(n,↗)Manual mode

0011110,5 1 1 yH(n,↗)Manual mode

1 0 0,55)6) 1 0 ±yBL2) ±Blocking operation

1 1 as above 0,55)6) 1as

0±yBL2) ±Blocking operation

0 1

0,55)6) 1a

ove 0 yS3) Safety operation

1) Source for yEat S85 = 0, 1, (4, 5 as of software version -A5), y isNas an absolute value assigned via S18. At S85 = 2,

3, y ES via the SES. The external manipulated variable through which SES (y ES) is fed in is tracked. When feeding in

via yNthe feeding instrument must be tracked. At S-output with internal feedback, a yE-selection is not possible, here

the last y before switching is held.

2) Blocking operation acts direction-dependently, changes to the opposite direction are possible.

3) Function yEin S-controllers with internal feedback (S2 = 1) drive open- or closed otherwise parameterizable safety

setting value.

4) 0.9 flashing rhythm 0.1 off, 0.9 on

5) 0.5 = flashing rhythm 1:1

6) only if HiHe = 1

7) for S51≠3,4

8) As of software version -A7 the signals HeDI and HeES with S51 = 3, 4 have dynamic effect (0/1-edge). They then act

like the Hi-signal (see figure 3-3, page 53)

(n) tracking takes place to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching

↗adjustable

Table 3-14 Output switching manual control station S/K (S1 = 4)

Manual operation has priority over tracking operation (S49 = 1)

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 89

3.4.7 Fixed setpoint controller with one setpoint (control system coupling)

(S1 = 5) 1)

c1, c2, c3

S45

SA,SE

S43

Factory setting

c1=c2=c3=0

x=x1+c1·(x2-c2 ·x3+c3)

II, IV

Adaptation

wi1

0/1

2...5

2/4 0/1/3

S51

1) as of software version --A5

w1ES

SES

S85

Int∨CB

AA=H∨N∨Si

H=Hi∨He

0000

III

0000 0000

Figure

3-29,

Page 110

Figure

3-21,

Page 92

Figure

3-1,

Page

Figure 3-19 Block diagram S1 = 5, fixed setpoint controller with one setpoint for control system coupling

This fixed setpoint controller is designed specially for coupling to the control system. The con-

trol interventions by signals Int and CB are available for locking the control system operation via

SES. With Int∨CB the setpoint signal wiES is separated and manual intervention via HeES at

S51 = 3 is suppressed.

The other wiring of the input function is almost identical with the structure S1 = 0 (see chapter

3.4.2, page 59). (Due to the control system control possible at S1 = 5, only an internal setpoint

can be implemented here)

S51 = 3 is expressly recommended for this connection.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.4 Controller types (S1, S42 to S45)

Manual

90 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

3.4.8 Slave controller without Int/Ext -switching (control system coupling)

(S1 = 6) 1)

tFI

c1, c3

SA,SE

Factory setting

c1=c3=0

x=x1+c1·x2+c3

S15, x1

Adaptation

c4, c5

Factory setting

c4=1, c5=0

wE=c4·wE+c5

1) as of software version --A5

S16, x2

II, IV

0000

S17

wEA

III

0000 0000

Figure

3-29,

Page 110

Figure

3-21,

Page 92

Figure

3-1,

Page 49

Figure 3-20 Block diagram S1 = 6, slave controller for control system coupling

This slave controller is designed specially for the control system coupling. It differs from the

structure S1 = 1 (see chapter 3.4.3, page 62) in that the setpoint switching to via Int and CB is

omitted and thus these control signals are available for locking the control system operation via

the SES. With Int∨CB manual intervention via HeES at S51 = 3 is suppressed.

The other functions are unchanged in relation to S1 = 1. S51 = 3 is expressly recommended for

this connection.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.5 Control algorithm

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 91

3.5 Control algorithm

DControl algorithm

The PID-control algorithm is implemented as an interaction-free parallel structure and follows

the ideal controller equations whilst neglecting the filter constants and the cycle time.

- P-controller

ya = Kp ⋅xd + yo or ya

xd =Kp

- PI-controller

ya = Kp (xd + xd dt) +yo(t) or =Kp (1 + )

Tn



⋅Tn

- D-element connection (zD-part)

The D-element connection can be added optionally.

ETv

=Kp j



⋅Tv

1+j



⋅

The input variable E for the D element is xd, x, x1,-z, or +z depending on the setting of

S47.

- z-connection

The z-part can be added optionally to the controller output ya.

ya = c6 ⋅zor

z=c6

DController direction of effect

The controller direction of effect is set with S46. It must always have the opposite behavior

(negative follow-up) to the controlled system (including final control element and transmitter).

S46= 0, normally acting controller (+Kp, rising x causes falling y) for normally acting systems

(rising y causes rising x)

S46=1, reversing controller (-Kp, rising x causes rising y) for reversing systems (rising y

causes falling x).

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.5 Control algorithm

Manual

92 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

S20

S15

S47

Kp·c7 1) i

P (S27)

S46

AHItF

0/1/3

-1

c6 z

YA, YE

yo=yn-(kp·c7·xd+c6·z)

Control structure

1) c7 in PI-operation = 1

c7 in P-operation 1 to 9.999 adjustable

-1

vv tv

Output structures S2

yo=yn-p

Input signal processing figure 3-1, page 49 and controller types S1

Figure 3-21 Block diagram controller structure

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.5 Control algorithm

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 93

DOperating point yo for P-controllers

The operating point yo of the P-controller can be set either automatically or as a parameter

(onPA).

Automatic working point (Yo = Auto)

Whenever there is no automatic operation (manual-, tracking-, safety- or blocking operation)

the operating point yo is tracked so that switching to automatic operation is bumpless.

This gives an automatic setting of the operating point yo in manual mode:

yo = yH-(Kp·c7·(w-x

H) + c6 · z)

If the actual value in manual mode (xH) is driven to the desired setpoint w by the appropriate

manual manipulated variable yH, the operating point yo is identical to the manual manipu-

lated variable yH.

yo = yH or yo = yH + c6 · z.

Fixed working point (Yo = 0 to 100 %)

The controller operates in all operating modes with the working point set as a permanent

parameter.

Dmanipulated variable limit YA, YE

The manipulated variable limit with the parameters YA and YE is only active in automatic

operation or in all operating modes depending on the switch position of S53. The limits of

these parameters are at -10 and +110 %. However, it should be taken into account that the

controller neither outputs negative actuating currents nor detects any negative position feed-

back signals.

If the manipulated variable yareaches one of the limits YA or YE in the limited operating

mode, further integration is aborted to avoid integral saturation. This ensures that the

manipulated variable can be changed immediately after reversing the polarity.

In manual-, tracking-(DDC) or safety operation, the manipulated variable y at S53 = 0 (limit-

ing only in automatic operation) can be driven out of the limiting range. When switching to

automatic operation the last manipulated variable is then transferred bumplessly but only

changes in the manipulated variable in the direction of the YA to YE range are subsequently

executed.

The manipulated variable limiting is possible at K-, two-position-and three-position-stepper-

controllers with external position feedback (S2 = 0, 1, 3).

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

94 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DBumpless switching to automatic mode

If there is no automatic operation (manual-, tracking, safety- or active blocking operation) the

I-part or the operating point yo (only at Yo = Auto) is tracked so that the switching to auto-

matic operation is bumpless. Any still active D-part is set to zero.

DP-PI-switching

With the control signal P = 1, the controller is switched from PI-to P-behavior, at Yo = Auto,

the switching is bumpless.

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

The controller structures follow four different controller output structures depending on structure

switch S2.

S2=0 K-controller

S2=1 Two-position controller with 2 S-outputs heating/cooling, optionally one K-output

S2=2 S-controller with internal feedback

S2=3 S-controller with external feedback

DS2=0: continuous (K) controller (figure 3-22, page 96 and figure 3-23, page 97)

To control proportional active actuators (e.g. pneumatic actuators or I/P-transformers) or as

command controllers in cascades.

actuating time tP,tM (onPA)

The setting speed of the automatic manipulated variable is set with the parameters tP and

tM. In the oFF position, no limiting takes place, in positions 1 to 1000 s the minimum

actuating time for 0 to 100 % manipulated variable is preset. Whereby tP acts during in-

crease and tM during decrease of the manipulated variable. The P-, I- and D-part as well as

the disturbance variable z is limited in the rise speed.

This setting speed limit is used:

- to avoid integral saturations in the actuating times of the following actuator>1 s

- to avoid hard output surges of the P-, D- and z-part.

In this case it must be taken into account that the control time is greater.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 95

DS2 = 1: two-position controller, with 2 S-outputs heating/cooling;

optionally one K-output

This output structure is identical to the K-output structure in its switching options (see figure

3-22, page96 and figure 3-23, page97).

The controller can be operated exclusively as a two-position controller (both outputs as

switching outputs) or as a controller with one K-output and one switching output.

The output variable can only adopt two states for every switching output + Δy, -Δy. Switching

on or switching off. The relationship between switching on- and switching off is defined as

setting ratio = switch-on duration

switch-on duration + switch-off duration

Switch on duration and switch off duration together give the period duration.

The setting range y from 0 to 100 % can be divided into two sub-ranges. The range Y1 with

a falling characteristic for cooling, the range 100% Y2 with rising characteristic for heating.

Two pulse stages are connected in series which transform the two sub manipulated vari-

ables into pulse-pause ratio. It is possible to use the manipulated variable limiting of y with

the parameters yA and yE, the setting ratio 1 is then not reached. Since the minimum pulse

duration or -pause can be set by tA or tE, further limiting is not normally necessary. A dead

zone can bset between these two sub manipulated variables. By changing Y1 or Y2 (oFPA)

the dead zone is preset and the slope adapted to the cooling- or heating aggregate.

Factory setting Y1 = Y2 = 50 % corresponds to dead zone = 0 %.

Every sub manipulated variable can be assigned a different period duration tP and tM

(onPA). In every chapter the setting ratio 0 to 1 is run through, whereby the shortest switch

on- or switch off duration is set with tE and tA (onPA). The period duration must be set so

that the respective best compromise between the minimum permissible switch on duration of

the actuator (e.g. contactor, solenoid valve, fan, cooling compressor), the switching fre-

quency and the resulting curve of the controller variable is found.

With structure switch S56 one of the outputs Y1 and Y2 can be switched to the analog

output (as of software version --B2).

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

96 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DDC

tE, tP

tA, tM

S51

S54

S85

+yBL -yBL

oFF

2/3

0/1/(4/51)

S55

S52

tP, tM (S2 = 0)

-Δy

S57

S53

+Δy

S57

S53

S29 S30 S19

PID

0/(3/4)1)

S18

SES

0/1

2/3/4/51)

S85

tP, tM

1) as of software version –A5

2) as of software version --B2

N/DDC

A=H∧N∧Si

H=Hi∨He

yES

yHES

yAn

yES

S56

12/13

10/11

0/1 S56

Figure 3-22 Block diagram K-controller S2 = 0 or two-position output S2 = 1

Tracking (DDC) has priority over manual operation S49 = 0

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 97

DDC N/

DDC

S29

S51

S85

+yBL -yBL

2/3

0/1/(4/5)1)

S52

tP, tM (S2 = 0)

S53

S30

0/(3/4)1)

SES

0/1

2/3/4/51)

S85

tP, tM

S18

HtE, tP

tA, tM

S54

oFF

S55

-Δy

S57

+Δy

S57

S19

yAn

yHES

PID

yES

A=H∧N∧Si

H=Hi∨He

yES

S56

12/13

10/11

0/1 S56

1) as of software version –A5

2) as of software version --B2

Figure 3-23 Block diagram K-controller S2 = 0 or two-position output S2 = 1

Manual operation has priority over tracking operation S49 = 1

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

98 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Y-display:

In switch position S54=2 the setting ranges heating/cooling are displayed with their setting

ratio [%]. Switching of the output stages is visible as a point in the display (10) and indicates

the setting range heating/cooling.

The ±Δy-outputs can be assigned to the appropriate digital outputs with the structure switch

S57.

The analog output is assigned by the structure switch S56.

y=0toY1(cooling-Δy)

period duration tM from 0 to 1000 s

minimum pulse pause, -length: tA

y = Y2 to 100% (heating +Δy)

period duration tP from 0 to 1000s

minimum pulse pause, -length: tE

setting ratio

0,5 0,5

100 %

40%

+Δy

―Δy

Heating

35% Y2

Chapter y = Y1 to Y2

Dead zone no setting pulses

Off

tM tM

tP tP

Cooling, example

with setting ratio = 50 %

Heating, example

with setting ratio = 50 %

Cooling

y-display

Continuous contact

clocking

Dead zone, no output

Cooling Heating

to to

Figure 3-24 Setting ratio, actuating pulses of two-position controller

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 99

DS2 = 2: Three-position step controller (S) with internal feedback

see figure 3-25, page 100 and figure 3-26, page 101

To control I-acting motorized actuating drives.

In S-controllers with internal feedback the K-controller is followed by an internal position con-

troller. The positioning control circuit consists of a comparator with following three-position

switch with hysteresis and an integrator in the feedback. The I-function of the actuator is

simulated by the integrator with adjustable actuating time tY (parameterization mode onPA)

which replaces the position feedback. To ensure the internal integrator and the K-controller

output do not drift apart or into saturation in time, both are set back rhythmically by the same

amount (synchronized). The y-output is only a relative manipulated variable. It is therefore

not possible to perform a manipulated variable limiting of YAand an absolute value preset of

YEund YS. The safety manipulated variable YSis specified as a direction-dependent con-

tinuous contact. At YS≤50 % (oFPA) -Δyswitches,atYS>50%,+Δy switches to continu-

ous contact so that the end positions of the actuator represent the safety position. The posi-

tion controller has an adjustable minimum pulse length (tE) and-pause (tA) with which the

response threshold of the position controller is set indirectly:

- Switching on Aee = 2 100 % ⋅tE

- Switching off Aea = 100 % ⋅tE

- Hysteresis Aee -- Aea = 100 % ⋅tE

- Pause Aa = 100 % ⋅tA

- tY = tP, tM set actuating time (parameterization mode onPA)

Aee must be set up after a pulse pause at least as a deviation until an actuating pulse with

length tE is output. Aea can remain as a constant control error of the position control circuit.

Aa can be set up after an actuating pulse as a deviation until an actuating pulse is output in

the same or opposite direction. When time tA has expired, the position controller reacts

accordingly to the set tE.

Setting criteria of tA and tE, see chapter 6.3, page 183.

The position feedback yRis only used to display the manipulated variable in S-controllers

with internal feedback. If it is not connected, S54 is set to 3, the y-display (9) is then dark.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

100 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

02, 3

S54

S55

S51

+ΔyH-ΔyH

yS>50

+yBL -yBL

PID

tP, tM

tA, tE

internal position control circuit

+ΔYa

0/(3/4)*

S30S29

* as of software version –A5

0/(3/4)*

yS≤50

-Δy

+Δy

S19

S57

GND

YAn

A=H

∧N∧Si

H=Hi∨He

111 00 00

Figure 3-25 Block diagram

S-controller with internal feedback S2 =2

Tracking (DDC) has priority over manual operation S49 = 0

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 101

2/3

S54

S55

S51

+ΔyH-ΔyH

tP, tM

tA, tE

internal position control circuit

+ΔYa

-ΔYa

+YBL

0/(3/4)*

S29

* as of software version –A5

0/(3/4)*

S30

-Δy

+Δy

S19

S57

GND

PID

YAn

yS>50

yS≤50

A=H

∧N∧Si

H=Hi∨He

+yBL -yBL

1 1

-yBL

Figure 3-26 Block diagram

S-controller with internal feedback S2 =2

Manual operation has priority over tracking (DDC) S49 = 1

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

102 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DS2 = 3: Three-position step controller (S) with external feedback

see figure 3-27, page 104 and figure 3-28, page 105

To control I-acting motorized actuating drives.

In S-controllers with external feedback the ”internal position control circuit” is replaced by a

real position controller (with the K-controller output y as a setpoint and the position feedback

yRas an actual value). As a result a manipulated variable limiting of ya and an absolute

value preset of yEand ys are now possible.

With the absolute value preset of y Eit is also possible to preset the manual manipulated

variable via the SES as an absolute value y ES in tracking operation.

Here too the response threshold of the position controller is preset with the parameters tE

(minimum turn-on duration) and tA (minimum turn-off duration) in connection with tP and tM

(actuating time positive/negative direction) which are all set in the parameterization mode

onPA:

- Switching on Aee =4 100 % ⋅tE

- Switching off Aea =3 100 % ⋅tE

- Hysteresis Aee -- Aea =100 % ⋅tE

- Pause Aa=100 % ⋅tA

tY = tP, tM set actuating time (parameterization mode onPA)

If a control deviation of xds≥Aee is set up, the three-position switch switches direction-

dependently to continuous contact. xds is reduced by the negative follow-up of the position

control circuit until xds <Aea is reached. The continuous contact is now switched off.

After the pause time tA pulses of length tE are output with subsequent pause time tA until

xds ≤Aee is reached.

-Aea -Aee

Aea Aee

-Δy

+Δy

xdS

These single pulses are also output if xds coming from zero does not reach Aee. These

single pulses which are not fully transformed into the path change (rotational movement)

additionally settle the control circuit, i.e. in theory (without lag) the single pulses would switch

off at 0.25 or 0.5 Aee. The opposite direction can only occur at appropriate control deviation

after the pause time tA.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 103

The manual adjustment is made as an incremental adjustment by far overranging of the

three-position switch so that manual adjustment is also possible when the position feedback

is interrupted. (Only at S54=1 or 3)

To simplify commissioning of the position control circuit, the manual manipulated variable is

preset absolutely at S54=0 (manipulated variable of the K-controller) so that the setpoint of

the position control circuit is changed continuously by the manual manipulated variable in

this structure switch position to enable optimization (see chapter 6.2, page 183 ). It should

be taken into account here that the manual manipulated variable which is also displayed is

changed faster by the actuating time tY than the active manipulated variable on the actuator

and a lag therefore takes place. The controlling status can be monitored on the Δy-LEDs (9)

in the y-display. After optimization, S54 should be set to 1 to display the active manipulated

variable via the position feedback yR.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

104 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

0/1 2/3

0,1

tP, tM

SES

<

PID

S51

yES

N/DDC

yHES

S57

-- y B L

+yBL

--Δy

+Δy

S19

2,3,4,5S85

yNyH

2,3

S54

S55

yAN

external position control circuit

S18

S53

0/(3/4)*

(4/5)*

S85

S53

S29 S30

S57

GND

tP, tM

* as of software version - A5

Figure 3-27 Block diagram S-controller with external feedback S2 =3

Tracking (DDC) has priority over manual operation S49 = 0

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 105

N/DDC

S51

0/(3/4)*

0/1/(4/5)*

2,3

PID

0/1

2/3/4/5

S85

S53

HSi

S57

-- y B L

+yBL

--Δy

+Δy

S19

2,3

S54

S55

yAN

external position control circuit

0S53

S29 S30

S57

SES

yHES

yES

tP, tM

* as of software version - A5

S18

S85

tP, tM

GND

Figure 3-28 Block diagram S-controller with external feedback S2 =3

Manual operation has priority over tracking (DDC) S49 = 1

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

106 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Control signals Message signals

Digital inputs Front Front Digital

outputs active y Explanation

yBL Si NHe7) Hi8) H

LED

y-Ext.

LED HNw

0,94)

ya(n)

yH(n), (↗)

Automatic mode

Manual mode

0,55)

yE(n) 1)

yE(n)

Tracking operation

as above

0,55)6)

above

yBL 2)

yS3)

Blocking mode

Safety operation

Table 3-15 Output switching of all controller types except DDC-fixed setpoint controller (S1 = 2)

Tracking operation has priority over manual operation (S49 = 0)

Control signals Message signals

Digital inputs Front Front Digital

outputs active y Explanation

yBL Si NHe7) Hi8) H

LED

y-Ext.

LED HNw

0,94)

ya(n)

yH(n), (↗)

Automatic mode

Manual mode

0,94)

0,55)

yE(n) 1)

yH(n), (↗)

Tracking operation

Manual mode

as above

0,55)6)

above

yBL 2)

yS3)

Blocking mode

Safety operation

Table 3-16 Output switching of all controller types except DDC-fixed setpoint controller (S1 = 2)

Manual operation has priority over tracking operation (S49 = 1)

1) Source for yEis at S85=0,1 (4, 5 as of software version -A5) yN, at S85=2, 3 yES via the SES. The external manipulated

variable fed in through the SES (y ES) is tracked. When feeding in via yNthe feeding instrument must be tracked.

2) Blocking operation acts direction-dependently, changes to the opposite direction are possible.

3) Function ySin S-controllers with internal feedback (S2 = 1) drive open- or closed otherwise parameterizable safety setting

value.

4) 0.9 flashing rhythm 0.1 off, 0.9 on

5) 0.5 flashing rhythm 1:1

n Tracked to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching

↗adjustable

6) only if Hi∨He

7) for S51≠3, 4

8) As of software version -A7 the signals HeDI and HeES with S52 = 3, 4 have dynamic effect (0/1-edge). They then act like

the Hi-signal (see figure 3-3, page 53)

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 107

DAutomatic mode (y = ya)

The automatic mode is switched on with the Automatic/Manual key or in the case of dynamic

switching (S51= 3,4) 1) via He (yellow manual LED (8) off). All other control signals He, N

(DDC), Si and ±yBL must be 0. The automatic manipulated variable is connected through to

the controller output.

DManual mode (y = yH)

Manual operation is switched on by the Automatic/Manual key (yellow manual LED(12) on)

or the control signal He as an OR function. The control signal He acts statically in the

structure switch positions S51 = 0,1 static. At S51 = 3,4 it is dynamic, i.e. every positive

edge causes a switching process. The control signals Si and ±yBLmustbe0.Iftracking

operation has priority over manual operation (S49=0), the control signal N (DDC) must also

be 0. Otherwise tracking operation or safety- or blocking operation become active, the

manual-LED then flashes in 0.5 rhythm as an identification. The manual manipulated

variable is switched through to the controller output. The manual manipulated variable is

preset in K-controllers as an absolute value, in S-controllers as a positioning increment.

DTracking-(DDC)-operation (y = yE)

The tracking operation is switched on by the control signal N (in DDC-mode by the control

signal CB and the Internal/External, see chapter 3.4.4, page 68). The control signals Si and

±yBL must be 0. If manual mode has priority over tracking mode (S49 = 1) the control sig-

nalH=Hi

∨He must be 0.

The external manipulated variable yEis connected through to the controller output. The

source for yEat S85 = 0, 1,(4, 5 as of software version --A05), is preset as an absolute

value y N. With S85 = 2, 3 the absolute value becomes active as an external manipulated

variable via the SES (yES).

In S-controllers with internal feedback (S2 = 2), absolute value presets of the manipulated

variable and thus the tracking operation are not possible.

DSafety operation (y = YS)

The safety operation is switched on by the control signal Si. The control signal ±yBL must

be 0. The safety manipulated variable YS is through connected which can be set as a para-

meter in the structuring mode oFPA in the range from -10 to 110 %. In S-controllers with in-

ternal feedback (S2 = 2) absolute value preset of the manipulated variable is not possible.

When safety operation is active, at YS≤50 % -Δy continuous contact and at YS > 50 % +Δy

continous contact is output so that the actuator drives to the end positions.

1) as of software version - A05

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

108 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DDirection-dependent blocking operation

Blocking operation is controlled by the control signals ±yBL. All other control signals have

no function. If a control signal is applied the manipulated variable output is blocked direction-

dependently, i.e. only changes in the opposite direction are allowed. If both control signals

are applied simultaneously, the output is blocked absolutely. The direction-dependent block-

ing is necessary especially in S-controllers with internal feedback and actuators with limit

stop switches to avoid integral saturation. If the control circuit is opened on reaching the end

position of the actuator, further integration of the controller must be prevented in order to be

able to react immediately in the event of control difference reversal.

As described above, the control signals ±yBL have priority over Si and H or N. Priority of H

or N can be selected via S49. All these operating modes have priority over automatic oper-

ation.

Signaling of the switching states is made by the LEDs Manual (12) and y-external (13).

When manual mode is active or preselected (if the priority opeating modes are active), the

manual LED lights up. He = 1 is signaled by a flashing rhythm of 0.9 (control signal) if Hi =

0 (i.e. is in automatic mode by the manual/automatic switching). When switching the control

signal He from 1 !0 the automatic mode becomes active.

Tracking-(DDC), safety-and blocking operation is signaled by the y-External LED. Flashing

rhythm 0.5 indicates that in ”manual operation priority over tracking operation”, manual oper-

ation is active but tracking operation is prepared and after switching to automatic operation

also becomes active.

DBlocking of the manual/automatic switching (S51)

With S51 the manual/automatic switching can be blocked in the operating mode Automatic

mode only or Manual mode only. The other operating modes are still possible. Then, tracking

mode is only possible if tracking has priority over manual mode (see figure 3-22, page 96).

DManual mode in the case of a transmitter fault (S50)

With S50 manual mode can be switched to when the transmitter group fault message occurs

(see chapter 3.2, page 47). Manual operation starts at S50=1 with the last y or at S50 = 2

with the parameterized YS. In both cases the manual manipulated variable can be adjusted

with the ±Δy keys after switching.

DSource and direction of effect of the y-display (S54, S55)

With S54 the y-display is switched to the different display sources or switched off. The abso-

lute manipulated variable y or the split range-manipulated variables y1and y2in two-position

controllers heating/cooling or the position feedback-signal yRin three-position-S-controllers

can be displayed.

With S55 the display direction rising/falling can be selected (see chapter 6.1), page 181.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.6 Controller output structures (S2, S49 to S55)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 109

DControl system coupling via the serial interface

As of software version A5 in addition to the DDC controller (S1 = 2) the SPC controller

(S1 = 1) a parallel process operation is possible in all controller types via the serial interface.

The control signals Int and Hi (via HeES at S51 = 3/4, see chapter 3.3, page 50) and the pro-

cess variables wi and y HcanbewrittenatS85≥2 via the serial interface so that switching

from internal to external setpoint and Automatic/Manual switching is possible in all controller

types. If the internal setpoint wi or the manual manipulated variable yHis active it can also

be changed by the SES or the adjusting keys on the front panel. Since the SES can only

adjust absolutely and not incrementally, it is advisable to use the setpoint ramp (tS) or the

dynamic manipulated variable with tP and tM to avoid steps.

This parallel operation using the serial interface can be locked at S51 = 3 by RC =Int∨CB

(see figure 3-3, page 53). This locking facility for the operation via SES on the controller

front is only useful in the controller types fixed setpoint controller with a setpoint (S1 = 5) and

follow-up controller without Internal/External switching (S1 = 6) because in all other controller

types both the Internal key and the control signal CB have other additional functions.

At S51 = 4 this locking facility is omitted and operation is always parallel to the front keys.

To avoid simultaneous actuation by the controller front and the SES the last switching action

can be read on the process control system. For this, a status bit is set when writing IntES

and HeES which is only reset when the front keys Int or Hi are actuated. By requesting the

status bit, the process control system can issue a warning when the last operation took

place via the front.

If the last operation took place via the SES the warning SES flashes for 3 s in the x/w dis-

play when the Internal key or the Manual key is pressed. This initial pressing of the keys

does not activate a switching function, only when the keys are pressed again is the desired

switching function triggered.

At S84 = 1 writing of status signals SiES... to ...tSHES is locked by /RC.

If the last operation took place via the serial interface the warning SES flashes for 3 s in the

x/w display when the internal key or the manual key is pressed. This initial pressing of the

keys does not activate a switching function, only when the keys are pressed again is the de-

sired switching function triggered.

At S84 = 2 writing of status signals SiES... to ...tSHES is locked by CB.

At S84 = 3*) the status signals SiES... to ...tSHES are always available via the serial interface

(siehe figure 3-3, page 53).

*) as of software version C1

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.7 Analog output signal processing (S56)

Manual

110 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

3.7 Analog output signal processing (S56)

The controller-internal variables are assigned to the analog output AO/Iy by structure switch

S56, whereby every controller variable can be structured to 0 or 4 to 20 mA.

The bipolar process variable xd is output with an offset of 50 % (10 mA or 12 mA).

Analog output Iy assignment and current range

S56 =

0 ... 20

4 ... 20

A10 AO/ly

50 %

0 ... 20

4 ... 20

100 %

0 ... 20

4 ... 20

0 ... 20

4 ... 20

0 ... 20

4 ... 20

0 ... 20

4 ... 20

0 ... 20

4 ... 20

0 ... 20

4 ... 20

100 %

as of software version -B2

Figure 3-29

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.8 Digital output signal processing (S57 to S75)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 111

3.8 Digital output signal processing (S57 to S75)

The message signals RB,RC... MUF, +Δw and -Δw are assigned to the digital outputs DO1 to

DO8 by the structure switches S58 to S68 and can be negated optionally with the structure

switches S69 to S75 (except +Δw and -Δw) (see figure 3-30, page 112).

The digital outputs DO1, DO2 and DO7, DO8 of the standard controller can be extended with

the options modules 4DO 24 V +2DI (6DR2801-8E) or 2DO-relay 35 V (6DR2801-8A) in slot 3

to a maximum 6 or 8 digital outputs respectively. When using 4DO 24 V +2DI in slot 3 by DO3

to DO6, when using 2DO-relay 35 V in slot 3 by DO3 and DO4.

When using options modules in slot 3, structure switch S22 must be set according to the as-

signment, otherwise there will be error messages (see chapter 5.5, page 179 ).

The control signals ±Δy (positioning increments of the S-controllers) are not negatable but

they can be assigned to one of the binary outputs DO1, DO2, DO7 or DO8. The setting of S57

has priority over assignments with S58 to S68. The assigned digital outputs for ±Δy are not

stored in “ST5” and “BABE” (refresh-time approx. 20 ms). Decription of ST5 and BABE: see

operating instructions “Serial SIPART 6DR190x Bus Interface”.

On assigning different control signals to the same digital output an OR-function of the control

signals is produced (exception at ±Δy).

Unassigned digital outputs (switch position 0) are low and can be set by SES at S85 = 2. All

digital outputs have wired-or-diodes.

DFunctional explanation of the digital message signals.

RB No computer standby of the controller

This signal indicates that the controller is in internal operation, i.e. not in computer

standby.

RC Computer operation

This signal indicates the negated computer operation RC =Int∧CB and controls the

setpoint switching or DDC-operation.

HManual mode

The controller is in manual mode, triggered either by manual/automatic-switching on the

front of the controller (Hi) or by the digital input signal He if the control signals Si, ±yBL

and N (with tracking over manual operation priority) are Low.

Nw Tracking operation

The controller is in tracking mode when the control signals Si, ±yBL and H (in manual

over tracking operation priority) are Low and the conmtrol signal N is High.

A1/A2 Alarm 1 and 2 indicate response of the limit value alarms A1 and A2.

A3/A4 Alarm 3 and 4 indicates response of the limit value alarms A3 and A4.

MUF Transmitter fault

The instruments’s analog input signals can be monitored for exceeding of the measuring

range. This signal gives a group alarm if an error is detected.

Δypositioning increments for the Δy-adjustment in S-controllers

Δwpositioning increments for the Δw-adjustment, only for control unit/process display

(S1 = 4)

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.8 Digital output signal processing (S57 to S75)

Manual

112 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

No assignment DO’s = 0 2)

S**

Assignment

with

S58

S59

S60

S61

S62

S63

S64

S65

S66

S67

-Δy

MUF

Structure-

switch

S68

+Δw

-Δw

Structure switch position

DO7

DO8

0/2

1/3

1/2/3

S57 S2

0/3

1/2

1/2/3

S57

0/2

1/3

S57 1/2/3

0S2

0/3

1/2

S57 1/2/3

0S2

S69

--1

S70

--1

S71

--1

RB =Int

RC =Int∧CB

+Δy

--1

DO1

DO2

1/7

1/8

24 V I

No assignment DOs = 02)

S72

--1

S73

--1

S73

--1

S74

--1

S74

--1

S75

--1

3/3

3/4

3/5

3/2

24 V I

Slot 3

DO3

DO4

DO5

DO6

4DO+2DI S22=11)

1/15

1/14

1/13

1) When using 2DO-relay 35 V, 6DR2801-8A (S22 = 3), only DO3 and DO4 are available.

2) At S**=0 there is no assignment, the digital outputs are then 0 and can be set at S85 = 2 by the SES.

3) Assignment of different control signals to one digital output causes an OR-function.

4) Message signal active tracking mode see page 111.

Figure 3-30 Assignment of digital outputs (S57 to S75)

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.9 Adaptation (S48)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 113

3.9 Adaptation (S48)

The adaptation procedure represents a reliable and easy to operate commissioning tool. The

adaptation procedure is far superior to manual optimization especially in slow controlled sys-

tems and in PID controller types. It is activated by the operator and can be aborted at any time

in the event of danger. The parameters determined by the adaptation can be changed and ac-

cepted specifically by the user.

In the parameterization mode AdAP which is only accessible at S48 ¸0, the following preset-

tings are made for the adaptation procedure:

tU Monitoring time

Pv Direction of step command

dY Amplitude of step command

With the structure switch S48 the choice of the control behavior (with or without overshoot) is

made.

The adaptation principle is divided into system identification and controller design.

DSystem identification

The controller is driven to the desired operating point manually. By pressing the Enter key

the set manual manipulated variable is changed by a step adjustable in the direction (dPv)

and amplitude (dY). The y-step is output at the end of 10 % of the set monitoring time (tU) if

there was a fixed state of the controlled variable during this time. Otherwise there is an error

message with abortion of the identification (see table 5-3, page 162 ).

The step response of the controlled system is then accepted with a max. 84 value pairs

(time and amplitude). The respective main controlled variable of the different control types is

filtered adaptively -- (see figures 3-6, page 61 to figure 3-7, page 62) and provided for sav-

ing. The storage procedure operates with cyclic data reduction and subsequent refilling so

that slow controlled systems can be entered.

After the start ID has been run through (the controlled variable x must have left the start ID

band within 50% of the set monitoring time tU), 95% of the full range must have been re-

ached at the latest at 2/3of tU. The set monitoring time (tU) must be ≥2*T95 of the con-

trolled system with safety reserve. The remaining time is required for the full scale identifica-

tion. The end value identification can also take place immediately after the start

identification, but 1/3of the performed measurements are always required for the end value

identification. Recording of the measured value pairs is ended on identifying the full scale.

A comparison with the recorded transient function is now made based on the stored

Ptn-models with n = 1 to 8 and equal time constants T by variation of n and T. The

determined line gain ks is transfered to the line models. The comparison is made over the

minimum error area F (n, T)

Additionally a special entry of real dead times is made which then shifts the identified control

line to higher orders.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.9 Adaptation (S48)

Manual

114 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Controlled systems with compensation and periodic transients of 1st and 8th order with a

transient time T 95 of 5 s to 12 h can be identified. Dead time parts are permissible. In

S-controllers, the transient time T95 should be double the actuating time max. (tP/tM).

The monitoring time tU serves to optimize the cancel criteria.

It can always be started with tU = off (dynamic system knowledge is unnecessary).

x measuring

process

Model curve xM

100500-10

F(n,T)=min

ymanual

Δy

Δx=ks⋅Δy

%tU

Full scale

67 %

Start ID

ID fixed state

Start of adaptation

Figure 3-31 Time curve of an adaptation without error messages in which tU = 2×T95

Error checks are made during system identification in order to be able to prematurely abort

the identification. There are 12 control steps altogether which are displayed by flashing on

the digital x- and w-displays when errors occur. As soon as an error message appears, the

system identification is aborted and it must be restarted after correcting the presettings in

the parameterization mode AdAP if necessary. Acknowledgement of error messages, see

chapter 5.4.2, page 155 list of error messages, see table 5-3page 162.

DController design

The controller is designed according to the absolute value optimum method (S48=2). This

setting method is very robust and also allows variation of the line amplification. However, it

generates an overshoot of approx. 5 % in the event of changes in the command variables. If

this is undesirable, operation can also take place with the controller design without overshoot

(S48 = 1). Kp is reduced to 80% here.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.10 Other functions of the standard controller

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 115

The controller is designed for PI and PID-behavior, therefore Kp, tn and for PID tv are calcu-

lated, whereby the derivative gain is fixed at 5. A prerequisite is that the D-element is con-

nected with xd/x/x1 (S47 = 0 or 2).

In S-controllers the response threshold AH is calculated in addition to Kp, tn, tv. The para-

meters tA and tE and tP/tM must be set beforehand according to the actuating drives used

(see chapter 6.3 page183 ). If the transient time T 95 is in the vicinity of 2 tP/tM (actuating

time), overshoots may also occur in controller designs with D-part even at S48=1.

In 1st order controlled systems a PI or PID controller design, in 2nd order systems a PID

controller design cannot be implemented according to the absolute value optimum because

in these cases Kp goes to 1. A controller design is made in which the ratio of system time

constant to control circuit constant is 3 (S48 = 1) or 10 (S48 = 2).

The new parameters for PI-controllers and for PID-controllers are offered when adaptation

has been completed.

In addition the determined system order 1 to 8 is displayed as a suffix to the PI- or

PID-identification.

The operating technique of the adaptation procedure is described in chapter 5.4.3, page

156, the commissioning explained in chapter 6.5, page 186.

3.10 Other functions of the standard controller

3.10.1 Adaptive filter

The control difference xd is fed through an adaptive filter. By adjusting tF (onPA) from oFF to

1 s the filter is switched on. By further increases to tF* the filter can be adapted to a low-fre-

quency disturbance frequency (seconds- to hours time-constant). Within a band in which

changes occur repeatedly, changes are interpreted as a fault by the filter and filtered with the

preset time constant tF, changes in a direction out of the band are passed unfiltered to the

PI(D)-algorithm to enable a faster control. If the disturbance level changes in time, the filter is

automatically adapted to the new level.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.10 Other functions of the standard controller

Manual

116 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Figure 3-32 Effect of the adaptive non-linear filter

The factory setting of tF is 1 s. In controllers with D-part -- it should be set as great as possible

because of the input noise amplified by vv Skp and in the adaptation.

3.10.2 Response threshold AH

The response threshold AH (dead zone element) is in the control difference connected after the

adaptive filter.

-AH

xdoutput

xdinput

Figure 3-33 Effect of the dead zone element

The dead zone element lends the controller a progressive behavior, at small control differences

the gain is low or even 0, at larger control differences the specified Kp is reached. It should be

taken into account that the remaining control difference can adopt the value of the set response

threshold AH.

The factory setting of AH is 0 % and can be set up to 10 % in the parameterization mode onPA.

In S-controllers the minimum necessary setting of AH is given by the minimum Δx=ks·Δy (see

chapter 6.3, page 183) and can be increased for further settling of the controlled system. In

K-controllers a small threshold value is advisable for settling the control circuit and reducing

wear on the actuator.

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.10 Other functions of the standard controller

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 117

3.10.3 Limit value alarm (S76 to S80)

The limit value alarm pairs A1, A2 and A3, A4 are assigned to the controller-internal variables

xd, x ... AI3A, AI4A, lxdl by the structure switches S76 and S77. Every limit value alarm pair can

be set to the monitoring functions Max/Min, Min/Min or Max/Max by S78 (A1, A2) or S79 (A3,

A4).

The response thresholds A1 to A4 and the hysteresis HA are set in the structuring mode oFPA.

According to the switch position of S80 only the display or the display and adjustment of A1 to

A4 is possible in the process operation level. In this case the switching cycle of the Shift key (6)

is extended by the response thresholds A1, A2 or A1 to A4:

Example display order switching key (6): w - y - A1 - A2 - A3 - A4 - x . . .

The respective limit value is displayed on the y-display (9), the value on the x/w-digital display

(3) or the w-bar display (2) and set depending on the assignment physically according to the

display format of the digital x/w-display or in %.

Display format Parameter range

S77

to digital x/w-dis-

play S80 > 0

Bar display

S80 = 5, 6 x/w-display

5/17

wv/lxdl

according to

dA to dE

-1999 to 9999

-110 % to 110 %

referenced to

dE - dA = 100 %

AI4A

% % - 110 % to 110 %

- 110,0 % to 110,0 %

3/17

w/lxdl according to**)

Ad to Ed

-1999 to 9999

%--110 % to +110 %**)

referenced to

Ad--Ed=100%

31/2/3*) x1/x/w

according to

Ad to Ed

-1999 to 9999

--110 % t o + 11 0 %

referenced to

Ad--Ed=100%

according to

dA to dE

-1999 to 9999

-110 % to 110 %

referenced to

dE--dA = 100 %

AI4A

% % - 110 % to 110 %

Table 3-17 Display format of the limit values A1 to A4

*) as of software version --A9

**) as of software version --C1

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.10 Other functions of the standard controller

Manual

118 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

A2 cannot be set greater than A1 and A4 not greater than A3.

The hysteresis HA is set in % in the range from 0.1 to 10 % and applies for all 4 limit values.

The function of the limit values (Min oder Max) always relates to the display, i.e. in the case of a

falling characteristic (dE< dA) the direction of effect is reversed. The set Min-function for

example becomes a Max-function related to the field signal.

S77

S76

Assignment

with

S**

AI1

AI2

AI3

AI4

AI1A

AI2A

AI3A

AI4A

lxdl

A1 +

Min.

Max

S78

-- 0

A1≥A2

Min.

Max

S78

A3 +

Min.

Max

S79

-- 0

A3≥A4

Min.

Max

S79

Figure 3-34 Assignment and function of the limit value alarms (S76 to S79)

3.10.4 Linearizer (S21, oFPA)

The linearizer is freely assignable to an input AI1 to AI4 or the main controlled variable x1. If the

main controlled variable is linearized, the range dA to dE is decisive, otherwise there is a per-

centage reference to the measuring range. The curve is rounded at the support points.

Example:Thermocouple 300 to 1000 C with transmitter without linearizer

Set start of scale and full scale dA and dE and the decimal point dP in the structuring mode

oFPA for the display. Divide measuring range UA to UE including ±10 % overflow in 10 % sec-

tions and determine partial voltages. L -1 to L11 are equidistant support points with 10 %-steps.

Un=n+U

Awithn=--1to11

UE-UA

UA = 4.31 mV

UE = 48.33 mV

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.10 Other functions of the standard controller

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 119

Determine the respective physical value from the appropriate function tables for every Unor

graphically from the corresponding curve (interpolate if necessary) and enter the value for the

respective vertex value (L-1 to L11 ) in physical variables in the structuring mode oFPA.

8 39.526 !L8 900

7 35.124 !L7 846

6 30.722 !L6 790

5 26.32 !L5 729

4 21.918 !L4 664

3 17.516 !L3 593

2 13.114 !L2 514

1 8.712 !L1 420

04.31 !L0 300

-1 -0.092 !L-1 0

tAtE

UE=48.33 mV

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200

110

100

-10

UA=4.31 mV

dA dE

t[˚C]

nUn[mV]vertex-t[˚C]

value

11 52.732 !L11 1048

10 48,33 !L10 1000

9 43.928 !L9 951

[mV]

Figure 3-35 Example of linearization of a thermocouple type B Pt30Rh/Pt6, measuring range dA to dE

from 300 to 1000 C

3 Functional description of the structure switches

3.10 Other functions of the standard controller

Manual

120 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

3.10.5 Restart conditions (S82, S83)

The restart conditions after mains recovery are determined with S82. With S82 = 0 the con-

troller starts after mains recovery and after a watch-dog-reset with the operating mode and with

the y which was active before the power failure. This variation must be used when temporary

mains failures are to be expected in slow control circuits.

With S82 = 1 starting after mains recovery takes place in manual- and in internal operation with

ys in the K-controller (S2 = 0) and two-position controller (S2 = 1) or with the last y in the three-

position controller (S2 = 2, 3). If only external operating mode or only automatic operation was

selected by S42 = 1 or S51 = 1 respectively, the restart takes place in these operating modes.

With S83 the optical signaling of mains voltage recovery and reset is determined by flashing of

the digital x-display. The flashing is acknowledged by pressing the Shift key (6) or by an alarm

request via SES.

3.10.6 Serial interface and PROFIBUS-DP (S84 to S91)

The structure switch determines whether operation is with SES (S84 = 1/2/3*)) or without SES

(S84 = 0) (see also “Control system coupling via the serial interface”, page 109).

With S85 the depth of the SES-interventions is preset. Generally all available set data are read.

In position 0 no transmission and reception of data to the controller is possible. In position 1

only parameters and structures can be transmitted. In positions 2 to 5 the process variables

wES (external setpoint via the SES), wiES (internal setpoint via the SES), yES (external manipu-

lated variable via the SES), yHES (manual manipulated variable via the SES) and all control sig-

nals can be sent additionally via the SES. At the same time, S85 switches over the sources for

the external setpoint wES or wEA and for the tracking manipulated variable y ES or yN.This

makes it possible to preset the process variables and the control signals only via the SES or the

process variables analogly and only the control signals via the SES.

With S84 = 1/2 writing of status signal SiES to tSHES canbelockedvia/RCorCB.

The structure switches S86 to S91 determine the transmission procedure through the serial

interface. See the user guide “Serial SIPART DR21 Bus Interface” for explanations; Internet

address: www.fielddevices.com [Edition 05.2000].

Settings for PROFIBUS-DP see table 5-5, page 172 (structure switch list).

*) as of software version C1

4 Installation

4.1 Mechanical Installation

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 121

4 Installation

4.1 Mechanical Installation

DSelecting the Installation Site

Maintain an ambient temperature of 0 to 50 _C. Don’t forget to allow for other heat sources

in the vicinity. Remember that if instruments are stacked on top of each other with little or no

gap between them, additional heat will be generated. The front and rear of the controller

should have good accessibility.

4.1.1 Work prior to installation

The controller type 6DR2100-5 is set to 230 V AC mains voltage in the as-delivered state. The

switching contacts are locked. The backplane module must be removed to change the mains

voltage setting or to unlock the relay contacts.

DRemoving the backplane module

!CAUTION

The backplane module may only be removed when the mains plug and the

3-pin ±Δy-plug have been removed!

Loosen the fastening screw (6) and pull the module out from the back.

(1)

(2)

(7)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(3)

1 Rating plate (example with two labels 115 V~) (as-delivered

state 230 V~)

2Plug

y-outputs

3 Mains plug

4 Fastening screw for DIN rail

5 DIN rail 35 mm (DIN EN 50022) for mounting the coupling

relay-modules 6DR2804-8A and 6DR2804-8B

6 Fastening screw for backplane module

7 PE conductor connecting screw

Figure 4-1 Rear of controller

4 Installation

4.1 Mechanical Installation

Manual

122 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DSwitching mains 230 V to 115 V

Fastening screw

Plug-in jumpers

(in the as-delivered state 230 V)

Figure 4-2 Setting the mains voltage

Re-plug jumpers as shown in the diagram in figure 4-2.

Stick the two labels provided (115 V power supply) to the rating plate in the field 230 V AC

and on the housing to the right of the mains plug vertically to the rear of the housing (see

figure4-1). Re-install the backplane accordingly.

DUnlock the relay contacts

Re-plug the plug-in jumper (figure 4-4, page 123) to unlock.

Labeling according to DIN 45100

Labeling on the

terminal block

15 47

14 49

13 48

3-pin

+/--y-plug

Relay contacts

DO7 (+y)

DO8 (--y)

locked (as-delivered state)

unlocked

Figure 4-3 Circuit

4 Installation

4.1 Mechanical Installation

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 123

(1) as-delivered state (locked)

(2) Spark quenching element Adapt resistance to connected contacts or servo motors if necessary.

(1) (2)

Figure 4-4 Relay contact locking

Re-install the backplane accordingly.

DChanging the tag plate and scales

(Please observe the “correct procedure”!)

The tag plate and scales can be labeled individually on the back with a smear-proof pen.

Figure4-5 Tagplate

4 Installation

4.1 Mechanical Installation

Manual

124 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Procedure / removing the front module

- Remove the mains module and any modules which may be plugged in.

- Turn the controller so that you are looking at the operating- and display front module from

the front.

- Carefully lever out the tag plate cover with a screwdriver at the cutout at the top and snap

the cover out of the bottom hinge points by bending slightly. Loosen the screw (captive)

Tilt the top of the front module at the head of the screw and pull it out angled slightly for-

wards.

- The scales can now be removed from the narrow side of the operating- and display front

module with a pair of tweezers.

4.1.2 Installing the controller

DPanel mounting

The SIPART DR21 controllers are installed either in single panel cutouts or in open tiers (di-

mensions, see figure 2-6, page 35).

Procedure:

- If necessary: Push the self-adhesive sealing ring for sealing the front frame/front panel

over the tube and stick to the back of the tube collar.

(to be ordered separately)

- Insert the controller into the panel cut-out or open tier from the front and fit the two

clamps provided to the controller unit from the rear so that they snap into the cut-outs in

the housing.

- Align the controller and do not tighten the locking screws too tight. The tightening range is

0to40mm.

* Installation depth necessary for

changing the main circuit board

and modules

Relay module

Figure 4-6 Dimensions SIPART DR21, dimensions in mm

4 Installation

4.1 Mechanical Installation

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 125

4.1.3 Installation of the options modules

General

Signal converter modules can be inserted in the slots provided in the SIPART DR21 controller

from the rear. The slots are coded to avoid plugging the modules incorrectly.

Jumper settings

Jumpers may have to be set on the modules I/U, R, SES (figure 4-7) before they are plugged

into the controller.

(1) Slot1 AI3(UNI,I/U,R)

(2) Slot2 AI4(UNI,I/U,R)

(3) Slot3 5DI;2DI4DO;2DOrel.

(4) Slot 4 SES (serial interface,

PROFIBUS)

(1)(2)

(3)

(4)

Figure 4-7 Rear of controller

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

126 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

4.2 Electrical Connection

4.2.1 Warnings and block diagram

The arrangement of the connecting elements can be seen in figure 4-7, page 125.

!WARNING

The ”Regulations for the installation of power systems with rated voltages

under 1000 V” (VDE 0100) must be observed in the electrical installation!

DPE conductor connection

Connect the PE conductor to the ground screw (see figure 4-8, page 128) on the back of the

controller. When connecting to 115 or 230 V AC-mains supply, the PE conductor can also be

connected through the three-pin plug (see figure 4-9, page 129). The controller’s ground-

connection may also be connected with the PE conductor (grounded extra low voltages).

!WARNING

Disconnection of the PE conductor while the controller is powered up can make

the controller potentially dangerous. Disconnection of the PE conductor is

prohibited.

DPower supply connection

The power supply is connected on 115 V AC or 230 V AC systems by a three-pin plug IEC

320/V DIN 49457 A, on 24 V UC systems by a special 2-pin plug (polarity irrelevant). The

mains plugs are part of the scope of delivery.

!WARNING

Set the mains voltage plug-in jumpers (see figure 4-2), page 122 in the no-vol-

tage state to the existing mains voltage.

It is essential to observe the mains voltage specified on the rating plate or by

the mains voltage jumpers (115/230 V AC) or on the voltage plate (24 V UC)!

Lay the power cable through a fuse; limit the rating (fire protection EN 61010-1)

to ≤150 VA. Limit the mains voltage alternatively to 30 V at 24 V UC.

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 127

DConnection of measuring- and signal lines

The process signals are connected via plug-in terminal blocks that can accommodate cables

of up to 1.5 mm2(AWG 14) cross-section.

Standard

controller

Terminal block 1, 2, 3 3-pin

4-pin

8-pin

S-outputs

AI1, AI2

AO,DI,DO,L

+,GND

Options modules Slot 1 and 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

4-pin

6-pin

9-pin

for analog input modules

for digital I-O-modules

for interface module

The coupling relay module should be snapped onto the DIN rail (figure 4-7, page 125) and

wired to the digital outputs.

Slots 1 to 4 must be identified in the circuit diagrams. Makes sure that the module-terminal

blocks are not switched.

Measuring lines should be laid separately from power cables to avoid the risk of interference

couplings. If this is not possible, or -- due to the type of installation -- the controller may not

function properly as a result of interference on the measuring lines, the measuring lines must

be shielded. The shield must be connected to the PE conductor of the controller or one of

the ground-connections, depending on the fault source’s reference point. The shield should

always only be connected to one side of the controller when it is connected to the PE

conductor to prevent creation of a ground loop.

The SIPART DR21 is designed with a high electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and has a

high resistance to HF-interference. In order to maintain this high operational reliability we

automatically assume that all inductances (e.g. relays, contactors, motors) installed in the

vicinity of or connected to the controllers are assembled with suitable suppressors (e.g.

RC-combinations)! To dissipate interference, the controller must be connected at the PE-

terminal of the cast body (figure 4-8, page 128 item 5) with good HF-conductance.

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

128 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

(1) Mains plug

(2) Power supply module

(3) Slot1 AI3(UNI,I/U,R)

(4) Slot2 AI4(UNI,I/U,R)

(5) Slot3 5DI;2DI4DO;2DOrel.

(6) Slot 4 SES (serial interface-,

PROFIBUS)

(7) Ground screw of the backplane module

(8) Fastening screw

(9) DIN rail, not included in the scope of deli-

very (accessories coupling relay module)

(10) Terminal block 1 AI1 to AI2 (I/U)

(11) Terminal block 2 AO; DI1 to DI2;

DO1toDO224V;

L+; M

(12) Terminal block 3digital outputs ±Δy

(6) (5) (4) (3)

(7)

(8)

(10)

(9)

(11)

(12) (2)

(1)

Figure 4-8 Controller backplane with terminal assignment of the standard controller

.NOTE

The screw-type terminal blocks for connecting the process signals to the con-

troller are of the plug-in type.

DZero-Volt-system

The SIPART DR21 controllers only have a 0V-conductor (ground, GND) on the process side

which is output double at terminals 11 and 12 of the standard controller. If these GND-

connections are not sufficient, additional proprietary terminals can be snapped onto the DIN

rail on the power pack. The controller uses a common GND-conductor for both inputs- and

outputs, all process signals are referred to this point.

The GND-connection is also connected to vacant terminal modules. These may only be

used if practically no input current flows through this connection (see e.g. figure 4-17,

page 133).

The power supply connection is electrically isolated from the process signals. In systems

with unmeshed control circuits, the SIPART DR21s need not be interconnected. In meshed

control circuits the GND-connections of all controllers must be fed singly to a common

termination or the continuous GND-rail with a large cross-section. This common termination

may be connected with the system’s PE conductor only at one point.

The signal current is tapped at the analog signal inputs by a four-pole measurement on the

input measuring resistor. Voltage dips on the supply lines therefore have no effect. In the

case of digital signals, the signal-to-noise ratio is so great that voltage dips on the GND-rail

can be ignored.

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 129

AI4A

S13

AI3A

S11

AI1A

AI3

Slot 1

Slot 2

I,U,R

AI4

Options

S18

DI1

DI2

24 V

L+

GND

+24 V

+5 V

UREF

S14

S21

S57 DO7

DO8

24 V

S56

S22

S20

S19

wIO/x3

S17

S16

S15

4DO 24V

2DI

2DO rel.

5DI

Slot 3

S84toS91

4/2

4/7

4/8

4/3

Slot 4

SES

DO2

DO1

+Δy

--Δy

AO/ly

IOptions

Standard-

settings

S1 to S3

Analog inputs

S4 to S21

Assignment

Slot 3

S22

Digital inputsS23toS41

Setpoint command

S42toS45

Control algorithm

S46toS48

Y-switching

S49toS53

Y-display S54toS55

Analog output S56

Switching output S57

Digital outputs

S58toS75

Limit value alarms

S76toS80

x/w display

S81

Restart

conditions S82toS83

Serial interface

S84toS91

Txd

Rxd

1/4

1/3

1/2

1/1

2/4

2/3

2/2

2/1

3/6

3/5

3/4

3/3

3/2

3/1

AI1

AI2

UNI

S8 to S10

S12

AI2A

249

6DR2100/

6DR2101

S-con-

troller

6DR2100/

6DR2104

K-con-

troller



Figure 4-9 Block diagram SIPART DR21

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

130 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

4.2.2 Connection standard controller

DPower supply connection

!CAUTION

Pay attention to mains jumpering (see figure 4-2, page 122)!

- 6DR210x-5 (115/230 V AC)

+24 V

+5 V

UREF

0.63 A slow-blow at 115 V

0.315 A slow-blow at 230 V

per controller

Three-pin plug IEC 320 IV DIN 49457A

230 V

115 V

LNPE

115 or 230 V AC



DR21

6DR210x-5

Fusing of the supply line

to VDE 0411 part 1

EN61 010, part 1 max. 150 VA

Other loads on the same

control loop

Figure 4-10 Connection 115/230 V AC power supply

- 6DR210x-4 (24 V UC)

1.6A, slow-blow

per controller

Special 2-pin plug, any polarity

UL=24VUC

+24 V

+5 V

UREF

Fusing of the supply line

to VDE 0411 part 1

EN61 010, part 1 max. 150 VA

or UL≤30 V

Other loads on the same

control loop

DR21

6DR210x-4

Figure 4-11 Connection 24 V UC power supply

1) The connection between the PE conductor screw (figure4-8, item 5, page128) to ground must be established addition-

ally for high electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) in 115/230 V-controllers.

This connection must also be low resistive for high frequencies (Cu-band or Hf-strand). Alternatively at least 2.5 mm2

flexible should be used.

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 131

DConnection of measuring- and signal lines AI1 and AI2

11/12

AI2AI1

UH+UH

L+

AI+

AI-

L+

AI+

AI-

AI+

GND

AI+

AI--

GND

GND GND

1) The series circuiting of several inputs is not possible because AI1/2 is connected internally to GND.

Set 0/4 to 20 mA with S4 to S5

AI--

Figure 4-12 Wiring AI1 to AI2, current inputs

DDI1 to DI2

<4.5 V

>13 V or

11/12

DI1

DI2

L+

GND

Set function with S23 to S33/S92

Set direction of effect with S34 to S40

Figure 4-13 Connection DI1 to DI2

DAO

≤900 Ω

0/4 ... 20 mA

11/12 GND

Function: 0/4 to 20 mA

Set with S56

Figure 4-14 Connection AO

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

132 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DDO1 to DO2

DO1

DO2

8≥19 V

≤50 mA

GND

Set function with S58 to S68

Set direction of effect with S69 to S75

11/12

Figure 4-15 Connection DO1 to DO2

DL+ (auxiliary voltage output)

≥20 V

≤60 mA

L+

GND

Figure 4-16 Connection L+

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 133

4.2.3 Connection of the options modules

4.2.3.1 Modules for analog measuring inputs

D6DR2800-8J (U or I-input)

GND GND

I4L

+UH

0/2 ... 10 V 0/0.2 ... 1 V

x5=x6/10 V x4=x5/1 V

(x8=x9) (x7=x8)

0/4 ... 20 mA

x4=x5/1 V

(x7=x8)

factory setting 1 V, x4=x5 (and x7=x8)

SetAI3inslot1withS6 measuringrange0to1V,10V,20mAor

AI4inslot2withS7 0.2V,2V,4mAto1V,10V,20mA

311

392

312

311

392

312

GND

1) possible load resistances of other controllers

2) x7, x8, x9 omitted from the circuit board

C73451--A3000-L106

311

392

312

L+

0to

500 Ω

1V/10V

49,9Ω

GND

x4 x5 x6

x7 x8 x9 2)

1V 10V

6DR2800-8J

I2L

Figure 4-17 Connection U/I-module 6DR2800-8J

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

134 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

D6DR2800-8R (resistor input)

Set AI3 ≙slot 1; S6 = 0 or 1

Set AI4 ≙slot 2; S7 = 0 or 1

RS1

≤200 Ω200 Ω

≤500 Ω500 Ω

≤1kΩ1kΩ

max.

UREF

20mA 1kΩ500Ω

49,9 243 332

5mA

IsIK

+24 V

ΔR

6DR2800-8R

for potentiometer with

Is%5mAor I

s=5 mA

R>1kΩ

factory setting S1 = 200 Ω

S1 = 20 mA

R⋅200 Ω

R -- 200 Ω

Rp=

4114

493

4114

493

S1=200 Ω

ΔR

4114

493

200Ω

Figure 4-18 Connection R-module 6DR2800-8R

- Calibration

1. Slide switch or plug-in jumper S1 according to measuring range

2. Set RAwith "0Adisplay or analog output (structured accordingly) to start value

or 4 mA.

3. Set REwith display or analog output to full scale value or 20 mA.

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 135

D6DR2800-8V (universal module for analog input)

The universal module can only be inserted in slot 1. It is assigned to AI3 with S6> 3 and

structured with S8, S9, S10.

The measuring ranges are set with the menu CAE3 (see chapter 5.4.6, page 173).

- Connector pin assignment for mV-transmitter S8 = 0

Direct input Umax =±175 mV

RL4

RL1

RL1+RL4≤1kΩ

Block diagram mV-module 6DR2800-8V

U+REF

Sensor

6DR2800-8V

Figure 4-19 Connection UNI-module AE3 S8=0

- Pin assignment measuring range plug 6DR2805-8J for U or I S8 = 0

89k1

200R 8k95

50R 1k

10 V

SMART

20 mA

perm. common mode

voltage 50 V UC

Measuring range plug 6DR2805-8J

Block diagram mV-module 6DR2800-8V

U+REF

Sensor

6DR2800-8V

10 V 20 mA

20 mA

SMART

L+

GND

1) DR21: Jumper must be plugged

Figure 4-20 Connection UNI-module AE3 S8=0 with measuring range plug

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

136 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

- Pin assignment for thermocouple TC S8 = 1, 2

U+REF

Sensor

6DR2800-8V

RL4

RL1 +R

L4≤300 Ω

RL1

Internal

reference point

6DR2805-8A

Internal

reference point

RL4

RL1

External

reference point

Block diagram mV-module 6DR2800-8V

Figure 4-21 Connection UNI-module AI3 S8 = 1, 2

- Pin assignment for Pt100-sensor RTD S8 = 3, 4, 5

RLper ≤100 Ω

RL4

Pt100

4-conductor

RL1

2-conductor

RL4

Pt100

RL1

RL2

3-conductor

RL4

Pt100

RL1

RL2

RL3

RL1 =R

L2 =R

L4 ≤50 ΩRL1 +R

L4 ≤50 Ω

Block diagram mV-module 6DR2800-8V

U+REF

Sensor

6DR2800-8V

Figure 4-22 Connection UNI-module AI3 S8 = 3, 4, 5

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 137

- Pin assignment for resistance potentiometer R S8 = 6, 7

2-Conductor terminal3-Conductor terminal

Block diagram of UNI-module 6DR2800-8V

RL4

RL1

RL4

RL1

RL2

1) Rs

RL4≤50 ΩRL1 +R

L4≤50 Ω

1) RsShunt impedance only necessary if 2.8 kΩ<R≤5kΩ

RS⋅Rp

RS+R

p≤2,8k, Rp>5KΩnot recommended

U+REF

Sensor

6DR2800-8V

Figure 4-23 Connection UNI-module AI3 S8 = 6, 7

4.2.3.2 Connection examples for analog measuring inputs with the module

6DR2800-8J

In current inputs the input load resistance is between AI+ and AI--.

If the signal is still required during service work in which the terminal is disconnected, the input

load resistance must be connected to the terminal between AI+ and AI--. The internal 49.9 Ω

resistance must then be disconnected in 6DR2800-8J by appropriate rewiring.

AI+

AI -

20 mA

49.9 Ω

1V/10V

49.9 Ω

optionally 6DR2800-8J

AI+

AI -

20 mA 4

set 1 V jumper

Figure 4-24 Current input via options modules, internal or external 49.9 Ωresistance

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

138 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

0/4to20mA

UHAI+

AI--

GND

49.9 Ω

6DR2800-8J

Figure 4-25 Connection of a 4-wire-transmitter 0/4 to 20 mA with potential isolation

0/4to20mA

+UH

AI+

AI--

GND

6DR2800-8J

49.9 Ω

Figure 4-26 Connection of a 0/4 to 20 mA 3-wire transmitter with negative polarity to ground

0/4to20mA

-UHAI+

AI--

GND 1

49.9 Ω

6DR2800-8J

Figure 4-27 Connection of a 0/4 to 20 mA 3-wire transmitter with positive polarity to ground

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 139

4to20mA AI+

L+

referenced to ground

49.9 Ω

6DR2800-8J

GND

Figure 4-28 Connection of a 4 to 20 mA 2-wire transmitter supplied from controller’s L+

49.9 Ω

6DR2800-8J

GND

4to20mA

Controller 1

AI+

AI--

L+

Controller 2

49.9 Ω

6DR2800-8J

GND

Figure 4-29 Connection of a 4 to 20 mA 2-wire-transmitter to two instruments in series supplied by L+ from

one of the instruments

Every input amplifier is supplied by a differential input voltage of 0.2 to 1 V. The input amplifier

of controller 1 has an additional common mode voltage of 0.2 to 1 V which is suppressed. Sev-

eral instruments with a total common-mode voltage of up to 10 V can be connected in series.

The last controller referenced to ground may also have a ground referenced input load (e.g. AI1

or AI2 of SIPART DR21).

The permissible load voltage of the transmitter must be observed in series circuiting of load re-

sistors.

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

140 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DVoltages 0/0.2 to 1 V or 0/2 to 10 V

AI+

AI--

GND

49.9 Ω

6DR2800-8J

Figure 4-30 Connection of a floating voltage supply

+UH

AI+

AI--

GND

49.9 Ω

6DR2800-8J

Figure 4-31 Single-pin connection of a non-floating voltage supply with negative polarity to ground

--U

AI+

AI--

GND

49.9 Ω

6DR2800-8J

only permitted when

connected for 1 V

Figure 4-32 Single-pin connection of a non-floating voltage supply with positive polarity to ground

Figure 4-31 and figure 4-32:

The voltage dip on the ground-rail between the voltage source and the input amplifier appears

as a measuring error. Only use when ground cables are short or choose a circuit configuration

as shown in figure 4-33, page 141!

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 141

+UH

AI+

AI--

GND

6DR2800-8J

Figure 4-33 Double-pin wiring of a voltage source with negative polarity to ground

6DR2800-8J

GND

Controller 1

AI+

AI--

L+

Controller 2

49.9 Ω

6DR2800-8J

GND

AI--

U49.9 Ω

AI+

Figure 4-34 Parallel wiring of a non-floating voltage source to two instruments.

The voltage source is supplied by L+ of one of the instruments and negative is referred to

ground.

Figure 4-33 and figure 4-34:

The voltage dip on the ground-rail between the voltage source and the input amplifier appears

as a common mode voltage and is suppressed.

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

142 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

4.2.3.3 Modules for expanding the digital inputs and digital outputs

D6DR2801-8C (5DI)

DI3 to 7 in slot 3 (S22 = 2) Set function with S23 to S33

Set direction of effect with S34 to S40

5 781

4 681

3 581

2 481

1 381

9L+ Standard controller

11 ⊥Standard controller

>13 V

<4.5 V

DI6

DI5

DI4

DI3

DI7

Terminals

Labeling according to DIN 45140

Figure 4-35 Wiring of 5DI module 6DR2801-8C

D6DR2801-8E (4DO 24 V +2 DI)

DO3 to DO6 in slot 3 (S22 = 1) Function DO with S58 to S68

DI with S23 to S33

Direction of effect DO with S69 to S75

Set DI with S34 to S40

6 481

5 685

4 585

3 485

2 385

1 381

9L+ Standard controller

11 ⊥Standard controller

>13 V

<4.5 V

≥19 V

≤30 mA

DI4

DO6

DO5

DO4

DO3

DI3

Terminals

Labeling according to DIN 45140

Figure 4-36 Connection of 4DO (24 V)-module 6DR2801-8E

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 143

D6DR2801-8D 2DO relay 35 V

!WARNING

The relay contacts are only permitted for switching voltages up to UC 35 C.

DO3 and DO4 in slot 3 (S22 = 2) Set function with S58 to S68

Set direction of effect with S69 to S75

5 497

4 496

6 495

Terminals

Labeling according to DIN 45140

DO4

2x68 V AC

1μ1μ

22 Ω

3 397

2 396

1 395

DO3 1μ1μ

22 Ω

....

......

AC contact load capacity

U≤35 V

I≤5A

max. power ≤150 VA

DC contact load capacity

U≤35 V

I≤5A

max. power ≤80 W at 35 V

≤100 W at 24 V

2x68 V AC

....

......

Figure 4-37 Connection of 2DO (relay) -module 6DR2801-8D

D6DR2804-8A (coupling relay 230 V, 4 relay)

6DR2804-8B (coupling relay 230 V, 2 relay)

Can be snapped onto DIN rail on the back of the controller.

Wired externally to the desired digital outputs.

These must then be structured with S57 to S68.

e.g. connection for ±Δy outputs in the S-controller with coupling relay 230 V, 2 relays

(6DR2804-8B)

420 V

GND

DO1

+Δy

DO2

--Δy

220 Ω

22n

11/

220 Ω

22n

GND

Figure 4-38 Connection of coupling relay 230 V 6DR2804-8B

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

144 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Contacts in the connection are interlocked!

!CAUTION

Observe the maximum switching voltage! (For excess resonance in phase

shift motors, see “CAUTION” on page 33)

The coupling relay 6DR2804-8B (figure 4-38, page 143) contains 2 relays. The coupling

relay 6DR2804-8A contains 4 relays. The terminals 1 to 9 are therefore available double.

AC 250 V

1250 VA

DC 250 V

30 W at 250 V

100 W at 24 V

4.2.4 Connection of the interface module 6DR2803-8C

4.2.4.1 RS 232 point-to-point (END/END)

Can be inserted in slot 4, set structure switches S84 to S91 for transmission procedure.

RS 485

Rxd

Controller Remote

system (PC)

4/2

4/3

4/7

4/8

Txd

Reference

RS 232

END/END

SIPART

BUS

RS 485

+150 R

Figure 4-39 Setting on the SES-module 6DR2803-8C with RS 232 point-to-point connection

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 145

4.2.4.2 RS 485 bus

Can be inserted in slot 4, set structure switches S84 to S91 for transmission procedure.

RS 232

END/END

SIPART -

BUS

RS 485

+150 R

Figure 4-40 Jumper settings SES-module 6DR2803-8C in RS 485 bus

Controller 32

RS 485 bus ≤1200 m

SES

Remote system

Controller 1

Controller 2

Rxd/Txd-B

Rxd/Txd-A

9-pin bus-plug for round cable: C73451-A347-D39

8 Rxd/Txd-A

3 Rxd/Txd-B

SES

Jumper setting RS 485

Jumper setting RS 485 + 150R

Note line termination:

The RS 485-bus must be terminated with

its characteristic impedance. To do this,

the terminating resistor in the ”last” bus

user is switched by plugging the coding

bridge appropriately.

Figure 4-41 RS 485-bus connection

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

146 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

4.2.4.3 PROFIBUS-DP, 6DR2803-8P

Technical Data

Transmittable signals RS 485, PROFIBUS-DP-protocol

Transmittable data Operating state, process variables, parameters and

structure switches

Transmission procedure

PROFIBUS-/-DP-protocol.

According to DIN 19245, Part 1 and Part 3

(EN 50 170)

Transmission speed 9.6 kbit/s to 1.5 Mbit/s

Station number 0 to 125 (note software version)

Time monitoring of the data communi-

cation

Can be structured on the controller in connection

with DP watchdog

Electrical isolation between

Rxd/Txd-P/-N and the controller

50 V UC common mode voltage

Test voltage 500 V AC

Repeater-control signal CNTR-P TTL-level with 1 TTL load

Supply voltage VP (5 V) 5 V --0.4 V/+0.2 V; short-circuit-proof

Line lengths, per segment at

1.5 MBit/s

200 m; for other data see manual “ET 200 Distribu-

ted I/O System”, order no. 6ES5 998-3ES22.

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 147

DConnecting the interface PROFIBUS-DP, 6DR2803-8P

Connection

Can be inserted in slot 4, set structure switches S84 to S91 for transmission procedure.

RxD/TxD-P

390R

DGND

220R

390R

PROFIBUS-

module

PROFIBUS-plug

Controller 1

(Slave)

RxD/TxD-N

Controller n

(Slave)

RxD/TxD-P

390R

6OFF

DGND 5

220R

390R

RxD/TxD-N 8

PROFIBUS-

module

RxD/TxD-A

RxD/TxD-B

Master

n max. number of controllers, dependent on master, max. 122

6ES7 972-

6ES7 972--

Switch

Figure 4-42 Block diagram SIPART DR21 via PROFIBUS-DP and bus plug to master

.NOTE line termination:

The RS 485-bus must be terminated with a characteristic impedance. To do

this, the switch in the bus connector must be switched ”ON” in the ”first” and

”last” bus users. The switch may not be ”ON” in any of the other bus users. A

detailed description and notes on cable laying and bus cable laying can be

found in the manual “ET 200 Distributed I/O System” order number

6ES5 998-3ES22.

4 Installation

4.2 Electrical Connection

Manual

148 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

5 Operation

5.1 General

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 149

5 Operation

5.1 General

DOperating modes

The SIPART DR21 is operated exclusively and fully with the operating keys on the front

module. The function of the operating panel can be switched between three main levels:

Process operation

mode

The process values x, w, y and the controller status are displayed,

the process operation mode can be controlled by the operating keys.

Selection level Here the list is selected which can be changed or activated in the

configuration mode. These are the following lists:

onPA Online parameters

(AdAP) Start adaptation

oFPA Offline parameters

StrS Structure switches

(CAE3) Set UNI-module

APSt all preset

The lists for onPA, oFPA, StrS and APST are always displayed in

the selection mode.

The lists for AdAP and CAE3 only appear in the display when they

have been selected by structure switches.

Configuration

modes

Settings are made in the selected list or functions are activated.

Some of the keys and displays on the front module are assigned different control and display

functions when the operating mode is changed. See the description of the respective main

level for details.

DOperating locks

Operation of the controller or access to the selection or configuration modes can be locked

by digital signals. The following blocking steps are possible:

bLb Blocking, Operation

The complete operation of the controller is blocked. Exception: Switching over the

w/x digital display. ”bLb” appears in the display on pressing the operating keys.

bLS Blocking, Structuring

Blocking the lists AdAP,oFPA,StrS,CAE3 and APSt.

Only the list for onPA is accessible. ”bLS” appears in the display when the blocked

mode is called

bLPS Blocking, Parameterization and Structuring

The complete selection and configuration mode is blocked. The process operation

mode is free. ”bLPS” appears in the display when the blocked mode is called

5 Operation

5.2 Process operation mode

Manual

150 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DBehavior of the controller in the factory setting

SIPART DR21 operates as a fixed value controller in the factory setting.

For safety reasons the online parameters, “proportional action factor Kp” and the “integral

action time Tn” are preset to uncritical values.

It is absolutely essential that these parameters be set to suit the requirements of your

controlled system.

5.2 Process operation mode

DControl elements

See page 5 for the control and display elements.

The operation of the SIPART DR21 in process mode requires no detailed explanation due to

the design and color scheme of the operating panel, the control elements and the labeling.

DActual value

The red vertical LED bargraph (1) and -- with the red x LED (5) -- of the four-digit digital

display (3) lit steadily indicate the actual value.

DSetpoint

The green vertical LED bargraph (2) and -- with the green w LED (4) -- of the four-digit digital

display (3) lit steadily indicate the setpoint. The green Internal/External key (16) switches

between the internal and external setpoint. The internal setpoint is set with the green ±Δw

adjusting keys (14), (15). The green internal LED (17) signals operation with the internal set-

point, C LED (18) also lights green when there is no CB control signal.

However, a change in the setpoint setting is only possible when the green LEDs (4 and 17)

signal that the four-digit display shows the setpoint and Internal operation is active.

DManipulated variable

In the y display (9) the manipulated variable y or, according to the position of the structure

switch S54, the position feedback y Ror split range y1/y2 is always displayed independently

of the variable output at the analog output AO.

The yellow H/A-key (11) is used to switch between manual and automatic operation. The

yellow manual LED (12) signals by lighting steadily or flashing that manual operation has

been activated. Lighting up of the yellow y external LED (13) signals an external intervention

in the manipulated variable, i.e. a tracking (DDC) , safety or blocking operation. The manipu-

lated variable generally displayed in the y digital display (9) can be adjusted with the yellow

±Δy keys (7), (8) in manual operation. The ±Δy LEDs (10) indicate the output of the posi-

tioning increments in all operating modes of the S-controller.

The alarm LEDs (20) and signal exceeding or dropping below the limit values.

5 Operation

5.2 Process operation mode

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 151

The adaptation LED (19) signals the progress of the parameter optimization during the

adaptation process by lighting steadily or flashing.

DAdaptation

The adaptation LED (19) signals the active adaptation procedure by flashing.

DLamp test

If the button (6) is kept pressed for longer than 5 s, all LEDs on the front of the controller are

driven independently of the respective display until the button is released again. The original

display position is restored after checking the lamp function.

DDisplay of the software version

The software for the SIPART DR21 controller will be improved based on new knowledge if

required. The respective version of the software is stored in the EPROM with identification

and can be called as follows:

"Run the lamp test with the button (6),

"Then press the button (16) additionally. On the digital displays (3) and (9) the

identification can now be read off for the controller software version.

DAlarms

The red alarm LEDs (20) signal exceeding or dropping below the limit values which can be

set with the offline parameters A1 to A4. The assignment to the variables to be monitored is

made with the structure switches S76, S77, their display with S80.

5 Operation

5.3 Selection mode

Manual

152 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

5.3 Selection mode

You enter the selection mode the various configuring menus by pressing the Shift key (6) for

longer (approx. 5 s) until ”PS” flashes in the y display.

Condition: Digital signal ”Blocking Operation” and ”Blocking Parameterization,

Structuring” are not active.

bLb = 0 and bLPS = 0

The controller operates in online mode in the selection level, i.e. its last operating mode is re-

tained, the current process variables can be traced on the analog displays (1), (2).

The configuration menus can be selected with the Δw keys (14), (15). If none of these menus

is called with the Enter key (11) within about 20 s (≙enter the configuring mode), the controller

automatically returns to the process operation mode.

SIPART DR21

SIEMENS

SP-W

OUT-Y

ADAPT

100

no function

Selection onPA-(AdAP)-oFPA-

StrS-(CAE3)-APSt

Command

variable w

Controlled

variable x

Adaptation LED: off

Shift key: Enter selection mode

PS (Parame-

terization/

Structuring)

Display of

selected con-

figuring level

Exit key ↗: Return to process-

operation mode

Exit LED: flashes

Internal LED: current status

Manual LED: current status

Enter key ↗: Jump to selected

Configuring mode

both LEDs off, no function

4, 5

Enter LED: flashes

Figure 5-1 Control and display elements in the selection mode

5 Operation

5.3 Selection mode

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 153

Exit key (16)

bLb = 1 or bLPS = 1

bLPS = 0

Enter key (11)

Shift key (6)

up to approx. 5 s

Process operation mode

Operating and Monitoring

bLb = 0

onPA

Exit-

key (16)

PS in the

y display flashes

Online-parameters

see chapter 5.4.2, page 155

Adaptation

see chapter 5.4.3, page 156

Parameterization mode (online)

AdAP, only appears

at S48 > 0

bLb or bLPS in the w/x-display,

PS in the y display flashes

At bLb = 1 no operation

at all is possible.

oFPA

BLS = 1

BLS = 0

StrS

CAE3, only appears

at S6 > 3

APSt

Δw key (14, 15)

Selection mode

Offine parameters

see

chapter 5.4.4, page 163

Structure switches

see chapter 5.4.5, page 165

CAE-menu

see chapter 5.4.6, page 173

All Preset (sets controller to

factory setting)

see chapter 5.4.7, page 178

Enter key (11)

Exit key (16)

Structuring modes (offline)

Release of the

Shift key (6)

Enter key (11)

up to (approx. 3 s)

Enter key (11)

up to (approx. 3 s)

Enter key (11)

up to (approx. 3 s)

Enter key (11)

up to (approx. 3 s)

Δw key (14, 15)

1) automatic return if there is no Enter function to a parameterization-or structuring mode within 20 s.

Figure 5-2 Overview selection mode

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

154 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

5.4 Configuration modes

5.4.1 General, Online and Offline modes

The settings in the configuration modes onPA and AdAP and the selection in the selection

mode (see fig. 5-2, page 153 takes place in online mode, i.e. the controller continues operating

in its last mode. The onPA and AdAP modes are entered directly from the selection modes by

pressing the Enter key (11). The analog x display (1) and w display (2) still display the process

image so that the reaction of the controlled system to parameter changes can be read off di-

rectly. The Internal LED (17) and Manual LED (12) and the Alarm LEDs A1 to A4 indicate the

current operating state. The Internal/External key (16) becomes the Exit key, the corresponding

CLED (18) indicates ready to exit, i.e. every time the LED flashes, pressing the Exit key jumps

from the selected mode to the next level up in the hierarchy.

The Automatic /Manual key (11) becomes the Enter key, the corresponding y external LED (13)

indicates ready to enter, i.e. whenever the LED flashes, pressing the Enter key jumps to the

next level down in the hierarchy.

Press the Enter key (11) for 3 s to go from the preselection mode to the offline mode with the

oFPA, StrS, APSt and CAE3 menus The user stays offline when returning (from offline menu)

to the preselection mode. When subsequently jumping to another off line mode the three-sec-

ond time condition is irrelevant. The three-second time condition for entering an offline menu is

only valid again after exiting the offline mode by selecting an online mode with the onPA and

Adap menus or exiting the preselection mode. The controller switches into the absolute

manual mode (offline mode), i.e. the last manipulated variable of the online mode is retained

(in K-controllers the last manipulated variable, in S-controllers no positioning increments are

output). A change in the manipulated variable using the ±Δy-keys (7), (8) is not possible, the

control signals N (DDC), Si and ±yBL are not effective. The analog output, the digital outputs

and the alarm LEDs A1 to A4 are held at the last value or status. To identify the offline mode,

the analog w display shows a striped pattern and the manual LED (12) lights up. The absolute

manual mode is retained when returning to the parameterization preselection mode (online

mode) or the process operation mode from the structuring preselection mode with the Exit key

(16). This also applies if only automatic operation has been preselected with S51 = 1. The con-

troller must also be reactivated in the process operation mode for safety reasons by switching

to automatic operation.

The analog x display (1) continues to display the controlled variable x during offline mode, the

Internal LED (17) the current status. The control elements keys (11), (16) and the LEDs (12),

(13), (17), (18) have the same function as in the online configuration modes.

If the control signal bLPS = 1, parameterization and structuring is blocked, no PS (w/x and y

displays) appears when you press the Shift key.

If the control signal bLS = 1, structuring is blocked. Only onPA and AdAP appear in the selec-

tion mode.

.NOTE

Please note that changed parameters and structure switch settings are only

transferred to the failsafe EEPROM after returning to the process operation

mode.

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 155

5.4.2 Configuration mode online-parameters onPA

The parameters for which the effect on the process when they are adjusted must be observed

directly are arranged in the parameterization mode onPA. The other parameters are arranged in

the structuring mode oFPA. After pressing the Enter key (11) in the onPA configuration mode,

the first parameter of table 5-1 Filter time constant tF in the y display (9) appears with its cur-

rent value in the w/x display (3) the first time the mains is switched on. Otherwise the parameter

selected last the last time the onPA mode was exited appears. With the Δy keys (7), (8) the pa-

rameters are selected, with keys Δw (14), (15) the value is set. The parameters with a large

number range can be adjusted in fast mode.

First select the adjustment direction with one Δw key and then switch on the rapid action by

simultaneously pressing the other Δwkey.

onPA Online Parameter list

parameters yNum. w/x display Unit

Parameter

name Min. Max.

Factory

setting

Filter time constant

for filter xd (adaptive)

Derivative-action gain Vv

Proportional gain factor Kp

Integral-action time Tn

Derivative-action time Tv

Response threshold

Operating point

off/1.000

0.100

1.000

off/1.000

0.0

Auto/0.0

1000

10.00

100.0

9984

2992

10.0

100.0

1.000

5.000

0.100

9984

off

0.0

Auto

Output start (YA≤YE)

Output end

y actuating time open/period heating

y actuating time closed/period cooling

-10.0

off/0.100

110.0

1000

-5.0

105.0

1.000

Actuating pulse pause

Actuating pulse length

tA 2)

tE 2)

1) 600

200

Filter time AI1

Filter time AI2

Filter time AI3

Filter time AI4

off/0.100

1000

1.000

Constant c1

Constant c2

Constant c3

Constant c4

Constant c5

Constant c6

Constant c7

-1.999

-9.99

+1.000

9.999

9.99

9.999

0.000

1.000

0.000

0.00

1.000

Display refresh rate dr 0.100 9.900 1.000 s

1) In two-position controller S2 = 1 up to 9980 ms

2) In two-position controllers: tA = shortest turn-on pulse and shortest pulse pause in the cooling branch

tE = shortest turn-on pulse and shortest pulse duration in the heating branch

Table 5-1 Online selection list

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

156 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

SIPART DR21

SIEMENS

SP-W

OUT-Y

ADAPT

100

no function

4, 5

Adjustment of parameter

valuewithrapidaction

Setpoint w

Setpoint x

Adaptation LED: off

Shift key: no function

Parameter

name

tF, vv... c1...c7

Parameter

value

Exit key ↗: Return to selection-

mode after onPA

Exit LED: flashes

Internal LED: current status

Manual LED: current status

Enter key ↗: no function

Enter LED: off

Figure 5-3 Control and display elements in the configuration mode onPA

5.4.3 Configuration mode adaptation AdAP

This mode only appears in the selection mode S48 > 0 (with adaptation). The Enter function to

the AdAP configuration mode is only possible when the controller is in manual mode. For this

the structure switch S51 must be ≠1 (see structure switch list, table 5-5, page 172). In the

parameterization mode AdAP, the controller influences the process online (but in manual opera-

tion).

A distinction is made between 4 different states in the AdAP configuration mode

- Pre adaptation,

- During adaptation,

- Aborted adaptation,

- Post adaptation

In pre- and post-adaptation the digital displays and the keys are used for the parameter display

and setting as is the case in the parameterization mode and structuring mode onPA or oFPA.

The complete process image as described in chapter 5.2, page 150 is displayed during adapta-

tion.

In the case of aborted adaptation the error message flashes in the digital w/xdisplay (3). The

error messages are acknowledged with the Enter key (11) (see figure 5-5, page 160).

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 157

DConditions for adaptation

- The controller must be in a stationary condition, i.e. the controlled variable x must be

constant.

- The system to be adapted must be a system with compensation, i.e. the manipulated

variable step in the adaptation must lead to a constant controlled variable x.

- No adaptation can be performed in stepper controllers with S2 = 2 and firmware version

A04 or earlier. Adaptation here is only possible in connection with the external feedback

(jumper setting via S19 to yR). As of firmware A05 or higher the change in the manipu-

lated variable required for adaptation is determined from the drive runtime. Accurate set-

ting of the parameters tP and tM is presumed.

- It is recommended to start the adaptation from the y value (operating point) usual for this

type of control circuit.

DPre adaptation

The controller must be switched to manual (key (11)) before entering the selection mode.

The ”AdAP” menu can only be selected at S48 > 0. It is called with the Enter key (11). The

adaption LED (19) is off and indicates readiness for adaptation. First the parameters for the

presettings (tU, dPv, dY) are displayed. They must be set according to the desired step com-

mand. Then the old online parameters appear on the displays (see table 5-1, page 155) with

their respective value. This can only be preset in the onPA mode.

NOTICE

Make sure the set step command causes no damage to the process control

system. The control loop is not closed during the adaptation. The adaptation

procedure is unsuitable for systems without compensation (systems with inte-

gral behaviour).

The selection of the parameters is made with the keys (7), (8), the setting of the values with

the keys (14), (15). The LED (13) flashes when ”Strt” appears in the w/x display (3). Adapta-

tion can now be started with Enter (11).

DDuring adaptation

The adaptation LED (19) flashes indicating that the adaptation is in progress. The process

can be monitored over the whole process display. Keys (7), (8), (14) and (15) have no func-

tion. The w/x display (3) can be switched over with the key (6) depending on the position of

S81. The adaptation can be aborted manually with the key (16).

DAborted adaptation

The current adaptation can be aborted manually or automatically by the error monitor.

The adaptation LED (19) is off indicating readiness for adaptation after error acknowledge-

ment. The Enter LED (13) flashes as a request for error acknowledgement.

Manual abortion can be activated in the event of danger by pressing the Exit key (16). The

program then jumps to the selection mode after AdAP. From there you can return to the pro-

cess operation level by pressing the Exit key (16) again. The controller is in manual oper-

ation and the manual manipulated variable can be adjusted.

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

158 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Automatic abortion is effected by the error monitors (see table 5-3, page 162). The error

messages are displayed on the digital w/xdisplay. The error message is acknowledged by

pressing the Enter key (11), the configuration mode AdAP is retained, tU is displayed, the

presettings can be corrected if necessary. The adaptation is aborted by the signals N (DDC),

Si and ±yBL. Abortion by the SES control signals N ES (DDC), SiES,±yBLES canbepre-

vented by Internal operation.

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 159

Process op-

eration mode

BLB = 0, BLPS = 0

Shift key

press for about 5 s

Selection

mode

onPA

AdAP

Configuration level AdAP

Pre-adaptation ↗

Pre-settings

Adaptation LED (19) off

(6)

Exit

(16)

Enter

(11)

Exit

(16)

Δw-

keys

(14, (15)

During adaptation

Adaptation LED (19) flashing

Complete process display

Parameter select-

able with Δykeys

(7), (8)

2) Parameter set

selectable with

Δw keys (14),

(15)

Start of

adaptation

Enter key

(11)

1) xx = manipulated variable

old para-

meter-

values

remain

retained

Enter

(11)

Error

message

acknowledge

Adaptation

repeat

Aborted adaptation

Adaptation LED (19) off

by errors

in the adap-

tation me-

thod see ta-

ble 5-3,

page 162

manually

Exit key

Error message

Exit AdAP for

error correction

Switch controller

to automatic

mode, new pa-

rameters are

effective

Old parameters

are overwritten

by new parame-

ters

Switch controller

to manual mode,

set desired

operating point

and wait for

stationary condi-

tion.

tU 0FF,0.1to24h

dPv nEG, PoS

dY 0,5to90%

xx1) Strt

Old values can

only be set in

onPA configur-

ation level

Post adaptation

Adaptation LED (19) on

new para-

meter values

can be chan-

ged with Δw

keys (14),

(15)

Pi..x

Pid.x2)

new parameter

values are provided for transfer

Figure 5-4 Overview configuration level AdAP

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

160 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DPost adaptation

The adaptation LED (19) is on indicating the end of adaptation. PI .x appears in the w/x dis-

play. You can switch over to PID.x with the keys (14), (15). These are the two controller de-

signs which have been determined for the new online parameters. The digit x stands for the

calculated system order. With the keys (7), (8) the new parameters belonging respectively to

the PI or PID controller can be displayed and their values changed with the keys (14), (15).

After pressing the Exit key (16) twice you go to the process operation mode. The previously

selected parameter set PI or PID is only entered now and becomes effective in the control

process after switching over to automatic operation with key (11). The respective other para-

meter set is not saved.

SIPART DR21

SIEMENS

SP-W

OUT-Y

ADAPT

100

no function

4, 5

Setpoint w

Controlled

variable x

Adaptation LED: Pre adaptation: off (adaptation standby)

Post adaptation: on (adaptation ended)

During adaptation flashes

Shift key: no function

Exit key ↗: manually aborted adaptation

Return to selection mode

after AdAP

Exit LED: flashes

Internal LED: current status

Manual LED: on (manual mode) current status

Enter key ↗: pre-adaptation ↗: Start of adaptation

Post adaptation: no function

after abortion ↗: error acknowledgement

both LEDs: no function

Enter LED:

Pre adaptation: only flashes when ”Strt” in w/x display (3)

Post adaptation: off, after abortion: flashes

Pre adaptation: Setting of values for adaptation default

Post adaptation: Adjust parameter value

Parameter name

tU,Pv,dy,vv,cP,

tn, tv, AH

Pre adaptation:

Adaptation defaults,

old parameter values

Post adaptation

PI or PID, new para-

meter values

after abortion:

Error messages

1) During adaptation: Display of the process variables

Figure 5-5 Control and display elements in the configuration mode AdAP

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 161

List of start parameters

Parameters ydisplay w/x display Unit

Parameter

names Min. Max.

Factory

setting

Monitoring time

Recommendation: “off” (automatic)

Direction of y step

Amplitude of y step,

Recommendation Choose step width so

that x rises/falls by about 10%.

off/0,1

nEG

0,5

PoS

off

PoS

0,5

Start position for adaptation y value Strt --

Pre adaptation controller parameter uu

vv value

Kp value

Tn value

Tv value

AH value

values

not

changeable 1)

Start position for adaptation y value Strt --

1) Value range see online parameters

Table 5-2 Parameter list AdAP

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

162 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DError messages of the adaptation procedure

yBL direction-dependent blocking mode via the control signals ⇒

n.ddc tracking or DCC mode by control signals ⇒

ovEr >10 % overshoot of the transient function

Shot

⇒adaptation of sufficient quality is possible

FASt because of too small a line time constant no

adaptation of sufficient quality is possible

P.oFL x outside the measuring span 0 to 100 % ⇒

n.End at 67 % tU full scale value not reached yet

⇒tU selected too small

⇒loop cannot reach full scale value,

e.g. integrally active line

⇒transient recovery time t95 >12 h

SMAL x after 50 % tU still within starting band

⇒tU selected too small

⇒y step too small

PASS step response in wrong direction within

30 % tU

⇒Change controller direction of effect (S46)

⇒control loop undershoot (all pass loop),

all-pass loops not defined among

loop models

y.OFL y outside the manipulated variable limits YA,Y

E⇒

(see online parameters)

nody after expiry of the step command the y step

in the S- controller is not yet executed correctly ⇒

Error messages Explanation

digital

x/w display

yManual y too big or too small

Check position feedback and drive of the final

control element

yManual y too big or too small

(transient recovery time t95 <5s)

cancel mode of

operation

-10 0

%tU

StAt not stable at 10 % tU after

Start of adaptation

⇒wait and restart adaptation

-10 0

%tU

30 100

x, y

100

-10 0

%tU

50 100

x, y

-10 0

%tU

67 100

x, y

-10 0

%tU

67 100

x, y

Si safety operation via the control signals ⇒

Table 5-3 Adaptation error messages

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 163

5.4.4 Configuration level offline parameters oFPA

The offline parameters determine basic functions such as display ranges, limit values, safety

values and transmission function of the input variables.

After pressing the Enter key (11) in the ofPA configuration mode (approx. 3 s), the first para-

meter of table 5-4, page 164 dP in the y display (9) appears with its current value in the w/x dis-

play (3) the first time the mains is switched on. Otherwise the parameter selected last the last

time the ofPA mode was exited appears. With the Δy keys (7), (8) the parameters are selected,

with keys Δw keys (14), (15) the value is set. The parameters with a large number range can be

adjusted in fast mode.

First select the adjustment direction with one Δw key and then switch on the rapid action by

simultaneously pressing the other Δw key. The ofPA display reappears after pressing the Exit

key (16) once. From this state you can change to any other offline configuration mode without

the 3 s wait necessary for a new entry by tapping the Enter key (11). This applies accordingly

for all offline configuration modes.

SIPART DR21

SIEMENS

SP-W

OUT-Y

ADAPT

100

no function

4, 5

Adjustment of parameter value with

rapid action

Controlled

variable x

Adaptation LED: off

Shift key: no function

Parameter name

dP...L11

flashing

Parameter

value

Exit key ↗: Return to selection-

mode after oFPA

Exit LED: flashes

Internal LED: current status

Manual LED: on (manual operation)

Enter key ↗: no function

Enter LED: off

Striped pattern

Identification

Offline

both LEDs: no function

Figure 5-6 Control and display elements in the parameterization mode oFPA

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

164 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

oFPA Offline parameter list

ydisplay w/xdisplay

Parameter Param-

names Min. Max. Factory

setting Unit

Decimal point w/x num. dP _. -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ___.-- --

Startofscale dA --1999 9999 0.0

Full scale dE --1999 9999 100.0

Alarm 1 A1 --110% to 110% 5.0

Alarm 2 (A2≤A1) A2 from dA, dE --5.0

Alarm 3 A3 at S76 / S77 = 5.0

Alarm 4 (A4≤A3) A4 0 to 5 and 17 --5.0

Hysteresis alarms HA 0.1 10.0 1.0 %

Setpoint start SA --10% to 110% -- 5 . 0

Setpoint end SE from dA, dE 105.0

Safety setpoint SH 0.0

Setpoint ramp time tS oFF/0.100 9984 oFF min

Ratio factor start vA 0.000 9.999 0.000 1

Ratio factor end vE 0.000 9.999 1.000 1

Safety output variable YS --10.0 110.0 0.0 %

Split range left (Y1≤Y2) Y1 0.0 100.0 50.0 %

Split range right Y2 0.0 100.0 50.0 %

L--1 --10.0 110.0 --10.0 %(1)

L0 --10.0 110.0 0.0 %(1)

L1 --10.0 110.0 10.0 %(1)

L2 --10.0 110.0 20.0 %(1)

Output values of the linearizer

(

)

(

)

L3 --10.0 110.0 30.0 %(1)

(

)

(

)

uidistant in

ut vertex

oints L4 --10.0 110.0 40.0 %(1)

(

)

L5 --10.0 110.0 50.0 %(1)

(1) Note

L6 --10.0 110.0 60.0 %(1)

t S21=5, values standardized to

to dE. L7 --10.0 110.0 70.0 %(1)

L8 --10.0 110.0 80.0 %(1)

L9 --10.0 110.0 90.0 %(1)

L10 --10.0 110.0 100.0 %(1)

L11 --10.0 110.0 110.0 %(1)

Decimal point 1) Pd _.------ ____ ___.--

Start value 1) Ad --1999 9999 0.0 --

Full scale value 1) Ed --1999 9999 100.0

1) as of software version -A9, only in ratio controller (S1 = 3)

Display range of controlled variable x1 and the weighted commanding process variable w (S81 = 7)

Table 5-4 Offline parameter list

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 165

5.4.5 Configuration mode structure switch StrS

The structure switches are software switches which determine the function and structure of the

controller. They are set in the offline mode.

After pressing the Enter key (11) in the StrS configuration mode (approx. 3 s), the structure

switch S1 in the y display (9) appears with its current setting in the w/x- display the first time the

mains is switched on. Otherwise structure switch selected last the last time the StrS- mode was

exited appears. The switch number is changed with the Δy keys (7), (8). If the adjustment direc-

tion is selected with a Δy key, tens steps of the counter can be generated by simultaneously

pressing the other Δy key. With the Δw keys (14), (15) the respective switch is set (see table

5-5, page 172).

SIPART DR21

SIEMENS

SP-W

OUT-Y

ADAPT

100

no function

4, 5

Adjustment of structure switch position

Controlled

variable x

Adaptation LED: off

Shift key: no function

Exit LED: flashes

Internal LED: current status

Manual LED: on (manual operation)

Enter key ↗: no function

Enter LED: off

Striped pattern

Identification

Offline

both LEDs: no function

Display

Structure-

switch setting

Structure

switches-

number 1 to 92

flashing

Exit key ↗: Return to selection-

mode after StrS

Figure 5-7 Control and display elements in the configuration mode StrS

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

166 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

StrS -- structure switch list

Structure

switch

posi-

tion Function

S1 Controller type

[0] Fixed value/three-component controller/controller with 2 internal setpoints

1Slave / synchronization / SPC controller

2DDC controller

3Ratio controller

4Control unit / process display

5Fixed value controller with 1 setpoint for control system coupling (as of software version-A7)

ngs

6Slave controller without internal/external switching for control system coupling (as of software

version -A7)

setti

S2 Output structure

[0] K--output

1S--output two-position controller with 2 outputs heating/cooling *)

2S--output: three-position step controller for motorized drives, internal feedback *)

3S--output: three-position step controller for motorized drives, external feedback *)

S3 Mains frequency suppression

[0] 50 Hz

160 Hz

S4 Input signal AI1 and transmitter fault message

[0] 0...20 mA without MUF

10...20 mA with MUF

24...20 mA without MUF

34...20 mA with MUF

S5 Input signal AI2 and transmitter fault message

[0] 0...20 mA without MUF

10...20 mA with MUF

24...20 mA without MUF

34...20 mA with MUF

S6 Input signal AI3 (slot 1) and transmitter fault message

[0] 0...20 mA or U,R,P,T without MUF

10...20 mA or U,R,P,T with MUF

24...20 mA or U without MUF

34...20 mA or U with MUF

uts

4UNI module Min at sensor break without MUF

inp

5UNI module Max at sensor break without MUF

log

6UNI module Min at sensor break with MUF

nal

7UNI module Max at sensor break with MUF

S7 Input signal AI4 (slot 2) and transmitter fault message

[0] 0...20 mA or U,R,P,T without MUF

10...20 mA or U,R,P,T with MUF

24...20 mA or U without MUF

34...20 mA or U with MUF

S8 Input signal AI3 (slot 1) with UNI--module (only active at S6=4/5/6/7)

[0] mV (linear), with measuring range plug U or I (no active sensor break monitoring)

1Thermocouple with internal reference point

2Thermocouple with external reference point

3PT100 4--wire connection incl. supply lines

4PT100 3--wire connection incl. supply lines

5PT100 2--wire connection incl. supply lines

6Resistance potentiometer with R < 600 

7Resistance potentiometer with 600 ≤R<2.8k

*) see chapter 6.3 “Adaptation of the S-controller to the actuating drive”, page 183

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 167

Structure

switch

posi-

tion Function

S9 Thermocouple type AI3 (slot 1) with UNI--module (only active at S8=1/2)

[0] Type L

1Type J

2Type K

3Type S

4Type B

5Type R

6Type E

7Type N

8Type T

9Type U

10 any type (without linearization)

S10 Temperature unit AI3 (slot 1) with UNI--module (only active at S8=1/2/3/4/5)

uts

[0] Degrees Celsius

inp

1Degrees Fahrenheit

og i

2Kelvin

Anal

S11

S12

S13

S14

Root extraction AI1 to AI4

no yes

AI1 [0] 1

AI2 [0] 1

AI3 [0] 1

AI4 [0] 1

S15

S16

S17

S18

S19

S20

Assignment of x1, x2, x3, yN, yR, z from AI1A to AI4A

0 % AI1A AI2A AI3A AI4A

x1 0[1]234

x2 0 1 [2] 3 4

x3/we 0 1 2 [3] 4

yN0123[4]

yR[0]1234

z [0]1234

S21 Assignment of the linearizer (see ofPA) open

[0] none

uts

1AI1

inp

2AI2

log i

3AI3

4AI4

5x1

S22 Assignment slot 3

[0] not used

14DO/2DI (DO3--DO6/DI3,DI4)

4DO/1DI (DO3--DO6/DI3,DI4=0)

lot

25DI (DI3--DI7)

32 relays (DO3, DO4)

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

168 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Structure

switch

posi-

tion Function

Assignment of the control signals to digital inputs

ital inputs

S23

S24

S25

S26

S27

S28

S29

S30

S31

S32

S33

S92

Stand. contr. Slot 3

Low DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 High

CB01234567[8]

He[0]1234567--

N 0[1]234567--

Si 01[2]34567--

P[0]12345678

tS [0]1234567--

+yBL[0]1234567--

--yBL[0]1234567--

bLb[0]1234567--

bLS[0]1234567--

bLPS[0]1234567--

tSH[0]1234567*)

* as of software version -B5

Dig

Direction of effect of the DIs on assigned control signals

S34

S35

S36

S37

S38

S39

S40

24 V = High 0 V = High

CB [0] 1

He [0] 1

N[0] 1

Si [0] 1

P[0] 1

tS/tSH [0] 1

+/--yBL [0] 1

S41 Control signal CB

[0]

static without acknowledgement

static with acknowledgement

dynamic as pulse (flip- flop effect)

S42 Blocking of internal/external setpoint switching

[0]

internal only

external only

no blocking

S43 x tracking at H or N (DDC) or Si

[0] no

chi

1yes

swit

S44 setpoint at CB failure

int

[0] last wi

tpoi

1safety setpoint SH

S45 Tracking wi to the active setpoint w

or tracking of wvi to the active nominal ratio wv

[0] yes

1no

S46 Direction of control action to xd ( w – x)

[0] normal (Kp > 0)

1reversed (Kp < 0)

gorit

S47 D-element connection

lal

[0] xd

trol

1 x

2x1

3z direction of control action against x

4z direction of control action with x

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 169

Structure

switch

posi-

tion Function

S48 Adaptation selection

trol

rith

[0] no adaptation

Con

algo

1control behavior without overshoot

2control behavior with transient recovery after the absolute value optimum

S49 Priority N (DDC) or H

[0] N (DDC)

1 H

S50 Manual mode with transmitter fault

[0] no switching (display only)

1manual operation starting with last y

2manual operation starting with ys

S51 switching manual / automatic via

output switching

[0]

Manual key Hi Control signal He Locking HeES

yes yes / static with

no yes / static with

no switching manual operation

yes yes / dynamic with

yes yes / dynamic without

S52 Iy switch--off in DDC or tracking mode (only K-controllers)

[0] without

1with

S53 Output variable limit YA / YE

[0] only active in automatic operation

1active in all operating modes

S54 Output variable display

[0] controller output y

1position feedback yR

2Split range y1/y2

ispl

3no display

ydi

S55 Direction of control action of the output variable display yAn

[0] normal: yAn = y

1reversed: yAn = 100% -- y

S56 Assignment of controller variables to the analog output

[0] y0to20mA

1y4to20mA

2w0to20mA

3w4to20mA

4x0to20mA

5x4to20mA

tput

6x1 0to20mA

out

7x1 4to20mA

log

8xd+50% 0to20mA

nal

9xd+50% 4to20mA

ng a

10 y1 0to20mA asofversion--B2

chi

11 y1 4to20mA asofversion--B2

wit

12 y2 0to20mA asofversion--B2

13 y2 4to20mA asofversion--B2

14 1--y1 0 to 20 mA as of version --B2

15 1--y1 4 to 20 mA as of version --B2

16 1--y2 0 to 20 mA as of version --B2

17 1--y2 4 to 20 mA as of version --B2

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

170 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Structure

switch

posi-

tion Function

S57 Assignment +/--y

[0]

DO1 DO2 DO7 (relay) DO8 (relay)

-- -- + Δy--Δy

+Δy--Δy-- --

-- --Δy+Δy--

+Δy-- -- --Δy

Note:

S57 has priority over S58 to S68

Assignment of message signals to digital outputs

Digital outputs

S58

S59

S60

S61

S62

S63

S64

S65

S66

S67

S68

Stand. contr. Slot 3 Standard controller

none DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8

(relay) (relay)

RB [0]123456 7 8

RC [0]123456 7 8

H [0]123456 7 8

Nw[0]123456 7 8

A1 0[1]23456 7 8

A2 01[2]3456 7 8

A3 [0]123456 7 8

A4 [0]123456 7 8

MUF[0]123456 7 8

+Δw[0]123456 7 8

--Δw[0]123456 7 8

Notes:

If DO1/2 or DO7/8 are occupied by S57 with +/--y, no double assignment is possible!

S67 and S68 only active at S1=4 (control unit/process display).

Direction of control action of the DOs on assigned message signals

S69

S70

S71

S72

S73

S74

S75

24 V = High 0 V = High

RB [0] 1

RC [0] 1

H[0] 1

Nw [0] 1

A1/A2 [0] 1

A3/A4 [0] 1

MUF [0] 1

Assignment of A1/A2 and A3/A4 to process variables

value alarms

S76

S77

xdx1 x wxvwvy y1y2AIAIAIAIAIAIAI AI|xd|

12341A2A3A4A

A1/ [0]1234567891011121314151617*)

A3/ [0]1234567891011121314151617*)

*) as of software version -B5

imit

S78 Function of the limit value alarms A1/A2

[0] A1 max /A2 min

1A1 min /A2 min

2A1 max /A2 max

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 171

Structure

switch

posi-

tion Function

S79 Function of the limit value alarms A3/A4

[0] A3 max /A4 min

1A3 min /A4 min

2A3 max /A4 max

S80 Display and setting of the limit values A1 to A4 in the process operation mode

Limit value alarms

[0]

Limit value display adjustable

w/x-digital display w bargraph display 1)

no no no

A1 / A2 no no

A1 / A2 / A3 / A4 no no

A1 / A2 no A1 / A2

A1 / A2 / A3 / A4 no A1 / A2 / A3 / A4

A1 / A2 A1 / A2 A1 / A2

A1 / A2 / A3 / A4 A1 / A2 A3 / A4 A1 / A2 A3 / A4

1) At S80 = 5/6 the limit values are displayed continuously, w is no longer displayed,

a responding limit value flashes (recommended at S1 = 4).

S81 w/x digital display switching

w/x display

[0]

I II III IV

x/xv w/wv -- --

x/xv w/wv x1/xv --

x/xv w/wi1/wv wE/wvE/wi2

x/xv w/wi1/wv x1/xv wE/wvE/wi2

x / x v -- -- --

-- w/wv -- --

-- -- x 1 /x v --

xv wv x1 w

Identification of the displayed variables by the w or x signal lamp: 1 = steady light, 0.5 =

flashing light, 0 = off

Display order

I II III IV

1 0 0.5 (0 at S81 = 6) 0 x signal lamp

0 1 0 0,5 w signal lamp

S82 Restart after mains recovery

[0] last operating mode, last w, last y

ions

1manual and internal operation, last w,

in K-and two--position controllers Ys,

in three--position controllers last y

esta

nditi

S83 optical signaling after mains recovery

[0] without flashing of the w/x digital display

1with flashing of the w/x digital display

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

172 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Structure

switch

posi-

tion Function

S84 Serial interface (slot 4)

0without

[1] with serial interface, with lock via RC

21) with serial interface, with lock via CB

31) with serial interface, without lock

1) as of software version --C1

S85 Data transfer

[1]

Reception Control signal Source for

by DR21 CBDI/CBES wEyN

nothing only wEA yN

Configuring CBDI

Configuring CBDI∨CBES wES yES

Process var. CBDI∧CBES

Status register CBDI∨CBES wEA yN

CBDI∧CBES

S86 Data transfer rate

[0}

19600 bps

4800 bps

22400 bps

31200 bps

4600 bps

5300 bps

rfac

S87 Cross parity

inte

[0] even

rial i

1odd

Ser

S88 Longitudinal parity position

[0] without

1after ETX

2before ETX

S89 Longitudinal parity

[0] normal

1inverted

S90 Station number

[0] 0

to to

125 125

S91 Time monitoring CB (ES)

[0] without time monitoring

1to 1sto

25 25 s

S92 see structure switch S33 following

Table 5-5 Structure switches

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 173

The serial interface in the DR21 must be set as follows for operation on the PROFIBUS-DP.

Structure switch Setting

S84

S85

S86

S87

S88

S89

S90

S91

3to125

0to9

5.4.6 Set UNI-module CAE3

The CAE3 menu is only offered in the selection mode if the structure switch S6 is set = 4 to 7

(input signal for AI3 is generated by the UNI-module)

With this menu the measuring range can be determined for the various signal transmitters

(selection with S8 and S9) and fine adjustment can be made.

S6 Input signal AI3 (slot 1) and transmitter fault message

[0] 0...20 mA or U,R,P,T without MUF

10...20 mA or U,R,P,T with MUF

24...20 mA or U without MUF

34...20 mA or U with MUF

4UNI module Min at sensor break without MUF

5UNI module Max at sensor break without MUF

6UNI module Min at sensor break with MUF

7UNI module Max at sensor break with MUF

S8 Input signal AI3 (slot 1) with UNI--module (only active at S6=4/5/6/7)

[0] mV (linear), with measuring range plug U or I

1Thermocouple with internal reference point

2Thermocouple with external reference point

3PT100 4--wire connection

4PT100 3--wire connection

5PT100 2--wire connection

6Resistance potentiometer with R < 600 

7Resistance potentiometer with 600 ≤R<2.8k

S9 Thermocouple type AI3 (slot 1) with UNI--module (only active at S8=1/2)

[0] Type L

1Type J

2Type K

3Type S

4Type B

5Type R

6Type E

7Type N

8Type T

9Type U

10 any type (without linearization)

S10 Temperature unit AI3 (slot 1) with UNI--module (only active at S8=1/2/3/4/5)

[0] Degrees Celsius

1Degrees Fahrenheit

2Kelvin

Table 5-6 Excerpt from the structure switch table

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

174 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DCalling, setting and leaving the CAE3 menu

- Press the shift key (6) for about 5 s until ”PS” flashes in the y display (9).

- Select the CAE3 menu with the Δw keys (14), (15)

- To enter the CAE3 menu, press the Enter key (11) for about 3 s.

- Select the CAE3 parameters with the Δy keys (7), (8)

- Set the CAE3 parameters with the Δw keys (14), (15)

- You return to the process operation mode by pressing the Exit key (16) twice.

DThe following parameters are available in the CAE3 menu for setting the measuring

range and adjustment

y display

parameter

name

w/x display

setting range

Factory

setting

Display

unit

Meaning/function of

parameter

Display and

function only

at:

tb 1) 0 to 400.0 50 _C, _F, K Reference temperature

external reference point

S8 = 2

Mr 0.00 to 99.99 10 ΩMeasuring of RLn.

(Pt100-2L) S8 = 5

Cr Difference value to Mr ΩCalibr. of RLn. (Pt100-2L)

MP _.------ to ____ physical

Decimal point measuring

range

MA 2) --19999 to 9999 0.0 Dimension

endin

Measuring range start

ME 2) --19999 to 9999 100.0

on the Measuring range full scale S8 = 0 to 7

CA act. measured value ±ΔA3) measuring

Calibr. Meas. range Start

CE act. measured value ±ΔE3) var

4) Calibr. Meas. range full

scale

PC 5) no, YES, no C no C -- Preset Calibration S8 = 0 to 5

Table 5-7 CAE3-menu parameter list

1) If no specified thermocouple type is selected with S9 = 10, the parameter tb has no effect.

2) The set measuring range is transferred as a standardized number range from 0 to 1 to the controller.

If the measured value mode is to be displayed physically, the offline parameters

dP, dA and dE must be set accordingly.

3) ForS8=0to5:ΔA, ΔE do not appear as own parameters. The correction values for calibrating the start or full scale

of the measuring range are arbitrary.

4) For S8 = 6, 7 the unit of the CA/CE display is in %.

5) ForS8=0to5:WithΔA=ΔE = 0, PC = no C is displayed, it is not possible to switch over with the Δw--keys (7), (8)

to PC = YES. By adjusting CA/CE, PC = no is displayed, switching to PC = YES is possible. If PC = YES is displayed

ΔA=ΔE = 0 can be set with the Enter key (press for approx. 3 s), whereupon PC = no C is displayed.

The corresponding settings of the CAE3 menu for the different signal transmitters are described

below.

The range and thus the current measured value can be corrected with the parameters CA/CE to

compensate tolerances of the transmitters or adjustments with other display instruments (for

S8=0to5).

To avoid measuring errors, the assembly instructions in chapter 4.2.2, page 130 and especially

the maximum permissible line resistances (see table 2-3, page 41) must be observed in the de-

termination of the measuring range.

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 175

5.4.6.1 Measuring range for mV (S8 = 0)

DMA/ME – set measuring range

Call parameters MA, ME, set range start and full scale:

Measuring range limits -175 mV ≤MA ≤ME ≤+175 mV

DCA/CE – fine adjustment (only if necessary)

Call parameter CA,

Set signal to start of scale

Correct the display with CA if necessary

Call parameter CE,

Set signal to full scale,

Correct the display with CE if necessary

5.4.6.2 Measuring range for U, I (S8 = 0)

only with measuring range plug 6DR2805-8J

DMA/ME – set measuring range

Call parameters MA, ME, set range start and full scale:

Measuring range limits -175 mV ≤MA ≤ME ≤+175 mV

Initialization in the measuring range plug

0 to 10V or 0 to 20mA signal corresponds to MA = 0mV ME = 100mV

2 to 10V or 4 to 20mA signal corresponds to MA = 20mV ME = 100mV

DCA/CE – fine adjustment (only if necessary)

Call parameter CA,

Set signal to start of scale

Correct the display with CA if necessary

Call parameter CE,

Set signal to full scale,

Correct the display with CE if necessary

5.4.6.3 Measuring range for thermocouple with internal reference point (S8 = 1)

DMA/ME – set measuring range

Call parameters MA, ME, set the start of scale and full scale according to the thermocouple

type (S9) and the temperature unit (S10).

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

176 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DCA/CE – fine adjustment (only if necessary)

Call parameter CA,

Set signal to start of scale

Correct the display with CA if necessary

Call parameter CE,

Set signal to full scale,

Correct the display with CE if necessary

5.4.6.4 Measuring range for thermocouple with external reference point (S8 = 2)

Dtb – external reference points-temperature

Set the external reference point temperature with tb. Specify temperature unit with S10.

Attention: tb has no effect at S9 = 10!

DMA/ME – set measuring range

Call parameters MA, ME, set the start of scale and full scale according to the thermocouple

type (S9) and the temperature unit.

DCA/CE – fine adjustment (only if necessary)

Call parameter CA,

Set signal to start of scale

Correct the display with CA if necessary

Call parameter CE,

Set signal to full scale,

Correct the display with CE if necessary

5.4.6.5 Measuring range for PT100 four-wire and three-wire connection

(S8 = 3,4)

DMA/ME – set measuring range

Call parameters MA, ME, set range start and full scale:

Measuring range limits -200 _C≤MA ≤ME ≤+850 _C

Specify temperature unit with S10.

DCA/CE – fine adjustment (only if necessary)

Call parameter CA,

Set signal to start of scale

Correct the display with CA if necessary

Call parameter CE,

Set signal to full scale,

Correct the display with CE if necessary

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 177

5.4.6.6 Measuring range for PT100 two-wire connection (S8 = 5)

DMR/CR adjustment of the feed line resistance

Path 1: The feed line resistance is known.

- Enter the known resistance with parameter MR.--

- CR is ignored.

Path 2: The feed line resistance is not known.

- Short circuit PT100-sensor at the measuring point.

- Call parameter CR and press the Enter key (11) until 0.00 Ω

is displayed.

- MR displays the measured resistance value

DMA/ME – set measuring range

Call parameters MA, ME, set range start and full scale:

Measuring range limits -200 _C≤MA ≤ME ≤+850 _C

Specify temperature unit with S10.

DCA/CE – fine adjustment (only if necessary)

Call parameter CA,

Set signal to start of scale

Correct the display with CA if necessary

Call parameter CE,

Set signal to full scale,

Correct the display with CE if necessary

5.4.6.7 Measuring range for resistance potentiometer (S8 = 6, 7)

Path 1 : The start and end values of the R- potentiometer are known.

- Call parameter MA, ME, set start of scale and full scale:

0Ω≤MA ≤ME ≤600 Ω/2.8kΩ

- Parameters CA/CE display at R=MA 0%, at R=ME 100 %.

The following applies for a 3-wire connection: R = Rp+R

The following applies for a 4-wire connection: R = Rp+R

L1 +R

Path 2 : The start and end values of the R- potentiometer are not known.

- Call parameter CA ,

Move output to position 0 %, press the Enter key (11) until 0.0 %

is displayed.

- Call parameter CE,

Move output to position 100 %, press the Enter key until 100.0 %

is displayed.

- Parameters MA/ME show the appropriate resistance values.

-MP must be set so that there is no ’exceeding of the range’ (display (3):

oFL)

5 Operation

5.4 Configuration modes

Manual

178 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

5.4.7 APSt (All Preset) Reset to factory setting

APSt serves to reset all controller functions (parameters and structures) to the factory setting.

We recommend you to run the APSt function first if major changes are to be made to the con-

figuration. The controller is in offline operation in the structuring mode.

NOTICE

The APSt function cannot be canceled.

SIPART DR21

SIEMENS

SP-W

OUT-Y

ADAPT

100

no function

4, 5

Adjustment no or YES, set YES

Striped pattern

ID offline

Controlled

variable x

Adaptation LED: off

Shift key: no function

Exit key ↗: Return to selection mode

after APSt

Exit LED: flashes

Internal LED: current status

Manual LED: ON (manual operation)

Enter key ↗: until configuration mode

StrS appears

both LEDs: no function

Enter LED: flashes if YES

Display

no or YES

(Parameteriza-

tion/structuring)

Figure 5-8 Control and display elements in the structuring mode APSt

No appears after jumping to the structuring mode APSt with the Enter key (11). Set YES with

+Δw key (14, 15) and press the Enter key (11) until the configuration mode StrS appears. The

Preset function is run. Select structuring mode Strs by pressing the Enter key and re-structure

the controller.

The offline and online parameters must also be reset.

5 Operation

5.5 CPU self-diagnostics

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 179

5.5 CPU self-diagnostics

The CPU runs safety diagnostics routines which run after only one reset or cyclically. The CPU

is familiar with two different types of reset:

Power On--Reset

always take place when the 5 V supply drops below 4.45 V, i.e. the power supply is interrupted

for longer than specified in the technical data.

All parameters and structures are reloaded from the user program memory into the RAM. The

current process variables and the controller status are reloaded from the EEPROM for these

data.

At S83 = 1 the digital w/x- display flashes as an indication after a Power-On-Reset, acknowl-

edgement is by the Shift key (6) for w/x digital display.

With S83 = 0, the flashing is suppressed.

Watch_dog Reset

The processor has an integrated watchdog which monitors the cyclic program runs indepen-

dently.

When a watch-dog reset occurs the parameters and structures from the user program memory

are loaded into the RAM. The current process variables and the controller status are read out of

the RAM for further processing.

There are no flashing signals on the front module.

tESt appears for a maximum 5 s in the digital w/x display after every reset.

Every detected error of the self--monitoring leads to a flashing error message on the digital w/x

display with defined states of the analog and digital outputs.

The reactions listed in the table are only possible of course (since this is a self-test) if the errors

occur in such a way that the appropriate outputs or the front module are still controlled properly

or the outputs themselves are still functioning.

Error message w/x

display

Monitoring of Monitoring time Primary cause of the error/remedy

during monitoring tESt

inthecaseofanerror

CPU

EEPROM,

RAM, EPROM

after every reset

monitored components of the CPU or

EEPROM de

ective/chan

e front module

MEM EEPROM when storing

OP.1.* 1) Data communi-

cation slot 1:

UNI-module

cyclic Option not plugged, defective or S6

does not correspond to plugged option /

plug or change option or correct S6.

OP.*.3 1) Data communi-

cation slot 3

4DO + 2DI or 5

DI option

cyclic Option not plugged, defective or S22

does not correspond to plugged

option / plug or change option or correct

S22 2)

1) also double error display OP.1.3 possible. * means digit dark

2) If 2DO relay is selected with S 22 = 3, no monitoring takes place.

At DI3 to DI7, S22 = 2 the effect of the digital inputs (after inversion) are set to 0 in the event of an error.

Table 5-8 Error message of the CPU

5 Operation

5.5 CPU self-diagnostics

Manual

180 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

6 Commissioning

6.1 Adapting the direction of control action to the controlled system

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 181

6 Commissioning

6.1 Adapting the direction of control action to the controlled

system

DDefinitions

Normal control action system

Rising y causes rising x; e.g. an increasing energy supply or mass flow causes a rising

temperature.

Normal effecting actuator (valve):

Increasing current or positioning command +y cause the actuating element (increasing y)

to open, e.g. more energy or greater mass flow. ydispl. is the displayed manipulated variable.

The direction of control action is referred to the controlled variable x1. The following state-

ments apply for transmitters with normal control action (increasing physical variable causes

increasing transmitter current), increasing process display (dE >dA) and no falling charac-

teristic in the linearizers.

DDirection of control action of system and final control element known

K-controller

The following is prescribed: Select the desired control action here:

Direc-

tion of

Direc-

tion of

Direc-

tion of

pressing the right key

causes in manual operation

ves

ese

ngs o

and S55 and the mode of oper-

ation of the controller

control

action

of the

system

control

action

of the

actuator

control

action

of the

system

and the

actuator

20 m

on actuat-

ing cur-

rent ly

valve Actual

value/

con-

trolled

variable

S46 Kp

(cP)

S55 ydispl. =

normal normal 100 % rises opens rises 0pos. 0 y

normal revers-

ing

revers-

ing

0% falls opens rises 1neg. 1100 % -y

0% falls closes rises 1neg. 1100 % -y

revers-

norma

revers-

ing 100 % rises opens falls 1neg. 0 y

ing revers-

normal 100 % rises closes rises 0pos. 0 y

ing 0% falls opens falls 0pos. 1100 % -y

Two more lines could be added to the table which are useless in practice: normal action system in which the actual values

falls with a rising change in the manipulated variable.

Table 6-1 Direction of control action and y-display direction of control action of the system- and final

control element direction of control action in K-controllers

6 Commissioning

6.1 Adapting the direction of control action to the controlled system

Manual

182 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

S-controller

The following is prescribed: Select the desired control action here: This gives the settings of S46

Direc-

tion of

control

Direction

of control

action of

Direc-

tion of

control

pressing the right key

causes in manual operation: Actual

value/

and S55 and the mode of

operation of the controller

action

of the

system

the

actuator

action

of the

system

and

actuator

active

switching output

valve

con-

trolled

variable

rises

S46 Kp

(cP)

S55 ydispl.=

normal +y

opens normal +yopens rises 0pos. 0 yR

revers-

+yrevers-

-ycloses rises 1neg. 1100 % - yR

ing

opens ing +yopens falls 1neg. 0 yR

If the actuator is connected reversing as an exception (+y closes), the position feedback must also be reversed and the

controller direction of control action (Kp) negated.

Table 6-2 Controller direction of control action and y-display direction of control action of the system-

and final control element direction of control action in S-controllers

DDirection of control action of system and final control element unknown

Put controller in manual mode, leave structure switches S46 and S55 in factory setting (0).

- Determine direction of control action of the final control element

Press the right manipulated variable adjustment key with the process switched off if poss-

ible or close to its safety position and observe whether the final control element opens or

closes. If the final control element opens this means it has normal action. If closing is de-

termined in S-controllers, the connections + y and - y should be switched.

The final control element can be observed as follows (if the direction of control action of

the system is known):

- normal control action system: rising x means normal control action actuator

- reversing system: falling x means normal control action actuator

- in S-controllers and already correctly connected position feedback

rising y-display means normal control action

actuator

- The final control element can be monitored additionally at the installation location.

- Determine the direction of control action of the system

Press the right output adjustment key and observe on the actual value display whether

the controlled variable (actual value) rises or falls. Rising means normal control action

system with normal action actuator, reversing control action system with reversing actua-

tor. Falling means reversing control action system with normal control action actuator,

normal control action system with reversing actuator. With the direction of control action

of actuator and system determined in this way, the controller can be set according to

table 6-1 and 6-2.

6 Commissioning

6.2 Setting of actuating time in K-controllers (S2 = 0)

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 183

6.2 Setting of actuating time in K-controllers (S2 = 0)

DActuating time tP, tM

Set the actuating time tP (open) or tM (closed) to the actuating time of the following actuator. If

the control circuit is to be settled additionally, e.g. to avoid hard impact on the actuating drive,

tP, tM can be further increased in Automatic operation.

The value of tP is usually set identical to the value of tM.

6.3 Adaptation of the S-controller to the actuating drive

DOutput Two-position controller for heating/cooling (S2 = 1)

The setting range y can be divided into two sections. The offline-parameters Y1 and Y2 and

the online-parameters YA and YE determine tehse sections(see fig. 3-24, page 98.)

The period duration and the shortest turn-on- and turn-off duration are determined in the

cooling branch (section [YA, Y1]) by the online-parameters tM and tA and in the heating

branch (section [Y2, YE]) by the online parameters tP and tE.

The period durations tP and tM should be chosen as great as possible, whereby the follow-

ing should be observed:

- Great values of tP and tM result in low wear of the internal and external switchgear.

- Large values cause a periodic fluctuation of the controlled variable x which is greater the

faster the controlled system is.

DS-controller with internal feedback (S2 = 2)

Set the actuating time of the actuating drive (e.g. 60 s) with the online-parameters tP, tM (0.1

to 1000 s).

NOTICE

The factory setting is 1 s!

The online-parameter tE (minimum turn-on duration) should be selected at least great

enough that the actuating drive starts moving reliably under consideration of the power

switches connected before it. The greater the value of tE, the more resistant to wear and

more gently the switching and drive elements connected after the controller operate. Large

values of tE require a greater dead band AH in which the controller cannot control defined

because the resolution of the controlled variable diminishes with increasing turn-on duration.

The factory setting for tE is 200 ms. This corresponds to a y-resolution in a 60-s-actuating

drive of:

100 % · tE

tP (or tM) =Δy= 100 % · 200 ms

60 s =0.33%

6 Commissioning

6.3 Adaptation of the S-controller to the actuating drive

Manual

184 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

The minimum possible resolution is transferred with the system gain Ks to the controlled

variable

Δx=K

s·Δy

The parameter tA (minimum turn-off duration) should be chosen at least great enough that

the actuating drive is safely disconnected under consideration of the power switches con-

nected before it before a new pulse appears (especially in the opposite direction). The

greater the value of tA, the more resistant to wear the switching- and drive elements con-

nected after the controller operate and the greater the dead time of the controller under

some circumstances. The value of tA is usually set identical to the value of tE.

tA = tE = 120 to 240 ms are recommended for 60 s actuating drives. The more restless the

controlled system, the greater the two parameters should be selected if this is reasonably

justified by the controller result.

The response threshold AH must be set corresponding to the set tE and the resulting Δyor

Δx. The following condition must be satisfied:

AH > Δx

2or AH > Ks⋅tE⋅100 %

2⋅tP (or tM)

Otherwise the controller outputs positioning increments although the control deviation has

reached the smallest possible value due to the finite resolution. For setting AH, see chapter

5.4, page 154.

DS-controller with external feedback (S2 = 3)

The position control circuit is optimized with the online-parameters tP/tM. The same relation-

ships apply as in the S-controller with internal position feedback whereby the dynamic of the

position control circuit (non-linearities, follow-up) is added to the criteria of the processability

of the positioning increments by the final control element. It will usually be necessary to se-

lect tP/tM and the resulting response threshold smaller than in the S-controller with internal

position feedback for the above mentioned reasons.

The position control circuit is optimized in manual mode. To do this, S54 is set to 0 for the

optimizing phase so that the manual manipulated variable is preset as an absolute value. It

must be noted that the active manipulated variable trails the manipulated variable display

due to the actuating time of the actuator.

In the case of non-linearity in the position control circuit, the optimization must take place in

the range of greatest slope.

Procedure for optimization of the position control circuit:

- Set S54 to 0 (position controller also active in manual mode)

- Set tA and tE so that the actuating drive can just process the positioning increments (see

S-controller with internal feedback).

- Set 1st order filter of the y R-input (t1, 2, 3 or 4) to 0.01 TP/TM (real actuating time of the

drive).

- Increase tP/tM until the position control circuit overshoots due to small manual changes

in the manipulated variable (observe opposite pulse on the Δy-LEDs (10) in the y-dis-

play).

6 Commissioning

6.4 Setting the filter and the response threshold

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 185

- Reduce tP/tM slightly again until the position control circuit settles.

- Reset S54 to 1 (position controller no longer active in manual mode)

6.4 Setting the filter and the response threshold

Set the structure switch S3 to the mains frequency 50 or 60 Hz existing in the system (factory

setting 50 Hz) to suppress faults due to the mains frequency.

DFilter of first order of analog inputs

The filter time constants (t1 to t4) for the input filters are set in the onPA-parameterization

mode and to the greatest possible value permitted by the control circuit without affecting the

controllability (t1 to t4 < Tg). When using the adaptation method the appropriate input filters

must be optimized.

DAdaptive, non-linear filters of the control difference

Since the dead zone sets itself automatically and its size is therefore unknown, the time tF

(onPA) can only be selected so great that the control circuit cannot oscillate in the case of a

large dead zone (tF less than Tg). When using the D-part (PD, PID) the use of the adaptive,

non-linear filter is strongly recommended because the input noise amplified by Kp·vv can be

suppressed.

If filters are required, they must be set before using the adaptation method.

DOptimization of the response threshold AH

If the output of the controller is to additionally settled or the load on the actuator reduced, the

necessary response threshold AH can be increased. The response threshold AH is given in

three-position controllers (S2 = 2, 3) by the setting of tE (see chapter 6.3, page 183) and

must automatically be greater than zero. In K-controllers and two-position controllers

(S2 = 0, 1) a response threshold of approx. 0.5 % is recommendable.

It must be taken into account that the remaining control error can assume the value of the

set response threshold.

6 Commissioning

6.5 Automatic setting of control parameters by the adaptation method

Manual

186 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

6.5 Automatic setting of control parameters by the adaptation

method

see chapter 3.9 “Adaptation (S48)”, page 113

The adaptation method should always be preferred to manual settings because the control

results with the parameters gained from adaptation are better especially in slow controlled

systems and this saves optimization time.

DPresetting

- S48 selecting the control behavior (structuring mode StrS)

No adaptation is possible when S48 = 0. In position1acontrolbehavior without over-

shoot is offered. In position 2 changes in the command variables can be expected with a

maximum 5 % overshoot.

- tU: Monitoring time (parameterization mode AdAP)

tU is only necessary for the error messages and has no influence on the quality of

identification It can always be started with tU = oFF. Otherwise tU must be set at least

twice as great as the transient time T 95 of the controlled system. After successful

adaptation tU is automatically set to 2T95. At tU < 0.1 h (6 min), tU = oFF is displayed.

- Pv: Direction of the step command (parameterization mode AdAP)

The direction of the controlled variable change from the set operating point is selected

with this configuring switch: xmanual ±Δx=±ks (ymanual ±Δy). In controlled systems

with batches it is recommendable to perform one adaptation with rising x and one with

falling x. The averaged or dynamically more uncritical parameters can then be used for

the control.

- dy: Amplitude of the step command (parameterization mode AdAP)

The step command must be selected so great that the controlled variable changes by at

least 4 % and the controlled variable change must be 5 times the average noise level. The

greater the controlled variable change, the better the identification quality. Controlled variable

changes of approx. 10 % are recommended.

DNotes on the adaptation results

-D-part

In S-controllers and K-controllers on 1st order controlled systems, the D part brings no

noticeable advantages due to the finite actuating time Ty or for reasons founded in the

control theory. The disadvantages in the form of wear on the positioning side dominate.

- Range limits

If one of the determined parameters reaches its range limits, the other parameter should

be adjusted slightly in the opposite direction of action.

If 8th order systems are identified, the determined kp must be reduced for safety

reasons. The determined Kp must be increased again if the control circuit is too slow

(uncritical).

6 Commissioning

6.5 Automatic setting of control parameters by the adaptation method

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 187

- Kp variation

In the special cases 1st order controlled system in connection with PI and PID controllers

and 2nd order controlled systems in connection with PID-controllers, the Kp can be va-

ried freely. In controller design according to the absolute value optimum, Kp can be in-

creased up to 30 % as a rule without the control behavior becoming critical.

6 Commissioning

6.5 Automatic setting of control parameters by the adaptation method

Manual

188 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Process opera-

tion-level

bLb = 0, bLPS = 0

Shift key

press for about 5 s

Selection-

level

onPA

AdAP

Configuration level

AdAP

Pre-adaptation ↗

Pre-settings

Adaptation LED (19) off

(6)

Exit

(16)

Enter

(11)

Exit

(16)

Δw-

keys

(14), (15)

During adaptation

Adaptation LED (19) flashing

Complete process display

Start of

adaptation

Enter key (11)

1) xx = manipulated variable

old para--

meter-

values

are

retained

new parameter-

values are provided for transfer

Enter

(11)

Error

message

acknowledge

Adaptation

repeat

Aborted adaptation

Adaptation LED (19) off

by errors

in the adap-

tation

method see

table 5-3,

page 162

manually

Exit key

Error message

Exit AdAP for

error correction

Switch controller

to automatic

mode, new

parameters are

effective

Old parameters

are overwritten

by new parame-

ters

Switch controller

to manual mode,

set desired

operating point

and wait for

stationary condi-

tion.

tU 0FF,0.1to24h

dPv nEG, PoS

dY 0,5to90%

xx1) Strt

Old values can

only be set in

onPA configu-

ration level

Post adaptation

Adaptation LED (19) on

new parame-

ter values

can be chan-

ged with

Δw-keys

(14), (15)

Pi..x

Pid.x2)

Parameter select-

able with Δy-keys

(7), (8)

2) Parameter set

selectable with

Δw-keys (14),

(15)

Figure 6-1 Overview configuration level AdAP

6 Commissioning

6.6 Manual setting of the control parameters

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 189

6.6 Manual setting of the control parameters

without knowledge of the plant behavior

The control parameters for optimum control of the system are not yet known in this case. To

keep the control circuit stable in all cases, the following factory settings must be made:

Proportional action factor Kp = 0.1

Integral action time Tn = 9984 s

Derivative action time Tv = oFF

DP-controller (control signal P = high)

- Set the desired setpoint and set the control difference to zero in manual operation.

- The operating point necessary for the control difference is set automatically in manual

operation at Yo=AUto (factory setting). The operating point can also be set manually by

setting the online-parameter yoto the desired operating point.

- Switch to automatic operation.

- Increase Kp slowly until the control loop tends to oscillate due to slight setpoint changes.

- Reduce Kp slightly until the oscillations disappear.

DPD-controller (control signal P = high)

- Set the desired setpoint and set the control difference to zero in manual operation.

- The operating point necessary for the control difference is set automatically in manual

operation at Yo = AUto (factory setting). The operating point can also be set manually

by setting the online-parameter y oto the desired operating point.

- Switch to automatic operation.

- Increase Kp slowly until the control loop tends to oscillate due to slight setpoint changes.

- Switch Tv from oFF to 1 s.

- Increase Tv until the oscillations disappear.

- Increase Kp slowly until oscillations reappear.

- Repeat the setting according to the two previous steps until the oscillations can no longer

be eliminated.

- Reduce Tv and Kp slightly until the oscillations are eliminated.

6 Commissioning

6.6 Manual setting of the control parameters

Manual

190 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DPI-controller (control signal P = Low)

- Set the desired setpoint and set the control difference to zero in manual operation.

- Switch to automatic operation.

- Increase Kp slowly until the control loop tends to oscillate due to slight setpoint changes.

- Reduce Kp slightly until the oscillations disappear.

- Reduce Tn until the control loop tends to oscillate again.

- Increase Tn slightly until the tendency to oscillate disappears.

DPID-controller (control signal P = Low)

- Set the desired setpoint and set the control difference to zero in manual operation.

- Switch to automatic operation.

- Increase Kp slowly until the control loop tends to oscillate due to slight setpoint changes.

- Switch Tv from oFF to 1 s.

- Increase Tv until the oscillations disappear.

- Increase Kp slowly again until the oscillations reappear.

- Repeat the setting according to the previous two steps until the oscillations cannot be

eliminated again.

- Reduce Tv and Kp slightly until the oscillations stop.

- Reduce Tn until the control loop tends to oscillate again.

- Increase Tn slightly until the tendency to oscillate disappears

6 Commissioning

6.7 Manual setting of the control parameters

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 191

6.7 Manual setting of the control parameters

after the transient function

If the transient function of the controlled system is active or can be determined, the control

parameters can be set according to the setting guidelines specified in the literature. The transi-

ent function can be recorded in the„ Manual operation” position of the controller by a sudden

change in the manipulated variable and the course of the controlled variable registered with a

recorder. This will roughly give a transient function corresponding to the one shown in

figure 6-2.

Good average values from the setting data of several authors give the following rules of thumb:

P-controller:

Proportional gain factor Kp≈Tg

Tu · Ks

PI-controller:

Proportional gain factor Kp≈0.8 · Tg

Tu ·Ks

Integral action time Tn≈3·Tu

PID-controller:

Proportional gain factor Kp≈1.2 · Tg

Tu · Ks

Integral action time Tn≈Tu

Derivative action time Tv≈0.4 Tu

y manipulated variable

x measured variable

ttime

Tu delay time

Tg compensation time

Ks transmission factor of the controlled system

xKs = x

Figure 6-2 Transient function of a controlled system with compensation

6 Commissioning

6.7 Manual setting of the control parameters

Manual

192 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.1 General

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 193

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.1 General

Frequent applications/connections of the SIPART DR21 controllers in the form of configuration

examples are listed below. The circuits are sorted according to their application S-controller,

K-controller, control unit/process display or two-position controller. All input and output connec-

tions and the order numbers of the respective required controllers or accessory modules are

stated. A principle circuit diagram of the control circuit and a short description make compre-

hension easier

We have purposely described the simple applications in very great detail to help the technician

above all who only needs to design these circuits very occasionally.

Mains voltage

As shown, the power supply must be fused and the PE conductor connected. The permissible

power supply range must be stated respectively with the type number of the controller.

Fuses and connecting leads are not supplied with the controllers.

Input circuits

A wide variety of input circuits are shown. Please note that the supply voltage remaining for the

transmitter may only be 15 V DC in the worst case when a two-wire transmitter is fed by the

SIPART DR21 and the analog inputs AI1/AI2 are used at the same time.

Output circuits

The outputs are represented uniformly. In S-controllers, the switching outputs are output via

relays which may be loaded with a max. 250 V AC. If the position outputs of the S-controller are

desired with digital signals, the digital outputs DO1 and DO2 must be used.

If inductances (e.g. positioning motors, contactors, etc.) are switched with the planned

relay outputs, an adequate interference suppression must be provided for on the system

side by wiring with RC-combinations or other suitable means in order to achieve EMC

protection aims.

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.1 General

Manual

194 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DConfiguring

Structure switches S

All controllers are supplied with the specified factory settings and must be structured to suit

the application during commissioning.

The switch positions for the respective application which deviate from the factory

setting are listed in the examples.

In addition other settings may be necessary due to system-specific criteria.

The following configuration examples have exclusively parallel circuits. Therefore the struc-

ture switches which relate to the serial interface are not specified.

Parameters onPA and oFPA

The controllers must be adapted in every case using the system data. The factory setting of

the control parameters must be selected so that the control loop does not tend to oscillate

even under worst case conditions (Kp = 0, 1, Tn = 9984 s). Kp and Tn or y0 and if necess-

ary Tv and AH must be set.

Control algorithm

All configuration examples (except Z1) are shown for PI or PID behavior. Switching to P or

PD behavior is possible with a digital input signal (structure switch S27). In the SIPART

DR21 as an S-controller, a P-or PD-controller operation is only possible with external posi-

tion feedback (S2=3).

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.2 Working with different setpoints

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 195

7.2 Working with different setpoints

Function diagrams are shown on the following pages which illustrate on the time axis how set-

points change when

- the Internal/External key (16) on the front is pressed

- the structured functions of the digital input DI are triggered with logic 1 or logic 0.

The structure switches named next to the examples must be put in the specified positions for

the illustrated functions. Structure switches not listed are in the factory setting.

Example 1 two-setpoint operation as a fixed setpoint controller

(see chapter 3.4.2, page 59)

At S81 = 2/3 both setpoints can be called with the key (6) in the four-digit display (3) and then

adjusted with the keys (14), (15) on the front of the instrument. Switching from w1 to w2 takes

place with the Internal/External switch (16) (at CB = 1). The active setpoint is always shown on

the analog bargraph display (2). At S81 = 0/1/5 only the active setpoint can be shown on the

digital display.

wi2

wi1

w(%)

100

S1 = 0

S23= 8

S45 = 1

S42 = 2

S81 = 2

w1=w

i1 (can be set on the front)

w2=w

i2 (can be set on the front)

tS = setpoint ramp

Int

CB = 1 = High

tS tS

Figure 7-1 Setpoint curve according to example 1

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.2 Working with different setpoints

Manual

196 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Example 2 Three-setpoint operation with a slave controller

(see chapter 3.4.3, page 62)

wEis an external variable setpoint

SH safety setpoint fixed by parameterization in oFPA

wi is an internal setpoint which can be adjusted on the front

The switching between wEand SH takes place with the digital signal CB (Internal/External key

(16) must be set to ”External”). The External/Internal key (16) switches between wE/SH and wi.

Figure 7-2 shows the setpoint curve with and without setpoint ramp tS.

SH wi

w(%)

100

Int

S1=1

CB on DI1 S 23 = 1

S 25=0(¸1)

S42=2

S43=0

S44=1

S45=1

wEon AI2 S 17 = 2

Int/Ext key

Int

Attention!

SH (safety setpoint) can

only be selected based on

wE(external setpoint).

Figure 7-2 Setpoint curve according to example 2

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.2 Working with different setpoints

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 197

Example 3 Four-setpoint operation with one slave controller with Internal/

External switching and CB signal through the digital input

The analog input AI2/wEis overcontrolled to 0 or 100%:

wi setpoint which can be adjusted on the front

wEsetpoint limit fixed by parameterization oFPA (setpoint limit start SA), wEover

controlledto0%.

SH safety setpoint set by parameterization.

wEsetpoint limit fixed by parameterization oFPA (setpoint limit end SE)

wEovercontrolled to 100 %.

Switchings take place:

wi= key (16) to Internal

wE= key (16) to External (INT), CB signal High (CB). AI2 overcontrolled to 0% (SA)

SH= key (16) to External, CB from High to Low (CB)

wE= key (16) to External (INT), CB signal High (CB). AI2 overcontrolled to 100% (SE)

Restriction of this circuit wi and SH must be within the limits SA to SE.

Also only the active setpoint can be displayed at S81 = 2/3. SH can only be reached by the

transition INT∧CB to INT∧CB.

wE(SA)

wE(SE)

w(%)

100

S1 = 1

wE on AI2 S17 = 2

CB on DI1 S23 = 1

S42 = 2

S43 = 0

S44 = 1

S45 = 1

Int/Ext key

100 %

DI1

AI2

Int

Attention!

SH (safety setpoint) can only

be selected based on wE(ex-

ternal setpoint).

Figure 7-3 Setpoint curve according to example 3

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.2 Working with different setpoints

Manual

198 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Example 4 Fixed setpoint controller with setpoint ramp (ts > 0)

Operation with an adjustable setpoint wi, with x tracking by Si (safety manipulated variable yS).

Due to x tracking the active setpoint follows the controlled variable x without a delay at Si=1 (DI

for safety manipulated variable). If Si becomes 0 the setpoint returns to the setpoint wiset

earlier with the setpoint ramp set as a time parameter. The setpoint ramp is not effective in x

tracking.

w= x

w(%)

100

S1 = 0

Si on DI2 S26 = 2

S37 = 0

x tracking S43 = 1

S45 = 1

ts > 0

w1=w

i(can be set on the front)

w2 = x (x tracking)

DI2(Si)

x(%)

100

y(%)

Attention!

SH (safety setpoint) can only

be selected based on wE(ex-

ternal setpoint).

Figure 7-4 Setpoint curve according to example 4

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 199

7.3 Configuration examples

Configuration example K1 Fixed setpoint controller as a K-controller

Controlled variable by a four-wire transmitter

Drive

The controlled variable x from the transmitter goes to the analog input

AI1 of the controller.

The input signal range is 0 to 20 mA.

The manipulated variable is also 0 to 20 mA.

Transmitter with UH=24V:

The transmitter can also be fed from the controller (+ at terminal 9 and

– at terminal 11).

Please read the foreword to chapter 7.1, page 193

AI1

SIPART DR21 standard controller

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 DO

GND

L+ AO

123 456789101112

Setting the structure switches:

S1 = 0

S2 = 0

S4 = 0, 1

S56 = 0

Slot 1

AI3

not

used

Slot 2

AI4

not

used

Slot 3

Limit value

Option module

6DR2801-8D

M1 A1 R2 M2R1 A2

123 456

Transmitter feed UH

-Δy

13 14 15

+Δy

GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

200 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Configuration example K2 Two common mode controllers as K-controllers; external set-

point from a two-wire transmitter with external feeding;

Controlled variables from two-wire transmitters, feeding from the

SIPART DR21 controller

Drive

The e

ternal setpoint is looped serially through both controllers.

Since the analog inputs AI1, AI2 of the controller are referenced to

ground, the options module must be used for the current input in

one of the controllers because this can process the appropriate

common mode voltage. The setpopint wEis evaluated differently in

the two controllers in this example. As a result the controlled varia-

bles x1, x2 have a constant relationship with each other.

The external common setpoint can be evaluated with the online

parameters c4, c5.

wE=c4·w

E+c5

If the factory setting is left in controller 1 c4 = 1, c5 = 0, the values

for c4, c5 of controller 2 in the controlled state gives the relations-

hip between the controlled variables x1,x

x1=x2 -- c5

wEDrive x2

y1 y2

Please read the foreword to chapter 7.1, page 193

Controller 1

Setting the structure switches controller 1:

S1 = 1

S2 = 0

S15 = 1

S17 = 3

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

not

used

Slot 3

Limit value

Option module

6DR2800-8J

-- R +

123 4

U-

external

-- +

--+

+18V<U_<+28V

not

used

AI1

SIPART-DR21 standard controller

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 DO

L+ AO

123 456789101112

-Δy

13 14 15

+Δy

1234 12345

GND GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 201

Configuration example K2 continued

Controller 2

Setting the structure switches controller 2:

S1 = 1

S2 = 0

S15 = 1

S16 = 0

S17 = 2

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

not

used

-- +

Slot 3

Limit value

Option module

6DR2801-8D

M1 A1 R2 M2R1 A2

123 456

not

used

AI1

SIPART DR21 standard controller

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 DO

2L+ AO

123 456789101112

-Δy

13 14 15

+Δy

123 4 123 4

Set online parameters c4, c5

GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

202 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Configuration example K3 Fixed setpoint controller as a K-controller

Controlled variable by a two-wire transmitter

Drive

The controlled variable x from the transmitter goes to the analog

input AI1 of the controller.

The transmitter is fed by the same lines. The input signal range

and the output manipulated variable of the controller are 4 to

20 mA.

Please read the foreword to chapter 7.1, page 193

Setting the structure switches:

S1 = 0

S2 = 0

S4 = 2, 3

S56 = 1

Slot 1

AI3

not

used

Slot 2

AI4

not

used

Slot 3

Limit value

Option module

6DR2801-8D

M1 A1 R2 M2R1 A2

123 456

When using AI1 the feed voltage at the transmitter may

be only 15 V under worst case conditions.

AI1

SIPART DR21 standard controller

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 DO

2L+ AO

123 456789101112

-Δy

13 14 15

+Δy

GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 203

Configuration example S1 Slave control, three-position step controller with internal feedback;

Controlled variable by a two-wire transmitter, externally fed

position feedback via an ESR;

External setpoint potentiometer

The controlled variable of the transmitter goes to the analog input AI1, the posi-

tion feedback of ESR to the analog input AI2 of the controller. A signal range of

0 to 20 mA is programmed for both inputs.

Transmitter and ESR are externally fed.

A cascade is disconnected preferably by switching the master controller to

manual mode. The slave controller is still in automatic mode, its setpoint is still

the output signal of the master controller, i.e. now its manual manipulated varia-

ble. The slave controller therefore becomes the fixed setpoint controller.

Switching back the master controller to automatic mode and thus the intercon-

nection of the cascade takes place bumplessly but not without drift if the set-

point of the slave controller but not that of the master controller was adjusted

during switching.

The drifting after switching back can be prevented if the master controller is

programmed with structure switch S43 = 1 to x tracking. Then the setpoint of

the master controller is tracked to the actual value which changes with the

delay time of the system as long as the cascade is disconnected.

wext

Drive

RARE

ΔR

AI1

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 DO

L+ AO

123 456789101112

Setting the structure switches:

S1 = 1

S2 = 2

S17 = 4

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

Spark quench-

ing internal

Slot 3

Limit value

Option module

6DR2801-8D

M1 A1 R2 M2R1 A2

123 456

not

used

M/A S E

123 4

Option module

6DR2800-8R

L+Δy

13 14 15

--Δy

S19 = 2

S42 = 1

S54 = 1

Please read the foreword in chapter 7.1, page 193 and the warnings in chapter 2.1 (from page 17)

SIPART DR21 standard controller

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

External setpoint potentiometer

R=R

A+ΔR+R

external

++--

-- x

ESR

+--

yR L

Perform spark quen-

ching according to

EMC requirements!

+18V<U<+28V

123 4

GND GNDGND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

204 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Configuration example S2 cascade control, K-controller and S-controller (internal feedback);

The controlled variables of the master controller and the slave con-

troller come directly from the resistance thermometers Pt100.

The master controller is a SIPART DR21 with K-output, the slave controller has

one three-position step output.

The controlled variables of both the master controller and slave controller come

directly from the resistance thermometers Pt100 and are connected at the ana-

log input AI3 in both controllers. The position feedback of the step switching

slave controller comes from a potentiometer, connected at the analog input AI4.

The output signal of the master controller is the setpoint for the slave controller

and is fed to its analog input AI1.

Drive

Command

controller K

Command

controller S

Master controller

Setting the structure switches of the master controller:

S1 = 0

S2 = 0

S6 = 4 to 7

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

not

used

Slot 3

Limit value

Option module

6DR2801-8D

M1 A1 R2 M2R1 A2

123 456

S8 = 4

S15 = 3

S17 = 0

Option module

6DR2800-8V

123 4

Please read the foreword in chapter 7.1, page 193 and the warnings in chapter 2.1 (from page 17)

AI1

SIPART DR21 standard controller

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 DO

L+ AO

123 456789101112

-Δy

13 14 15

+Δy

Pt100

RL1 =R

L2 =R

L4 ≤50 Ω

RL1 RL2 RL4

123 4

GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 205

Configuration example S2 continued

AI1

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 DO

L+ AO

123 456789101112

Slave controller

Setting the structure switches of the follow-up controller:

S1 = 1

S2 = 3

S6 = 4 to 7

S7 = 0, 1

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

Spark quench-

ing internal

Slot 3

Limit value

Option module

6DR2801-8D

M1 A1 R2 M2R1 A2

123 456

M/A S E

123 4

Option module

6DR2800-8R

L+Δy

13 14 15

--Δy

S8 = 4

S15 = 3

S17 = 1

S19 = 4

SIPART DR21 standard controller

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

Perform spark

quenching

according to

EMC

requirements!

S42 = 1,

S54 = 1

Option module

6DR2800-8V

123 4

RL1 RL2 RL4

Pt100

GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

206 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Configuration example S3 Ratio control, S-controller (internal feedback)

Commanded process variable and commanding variable directly from

two-wire transmitters

The commanded process variable x1 from the transmitter goes to the analog

input AI1, the commanding process variable is connected to the analog input AI2.

The input signal ranges are 4 to 20 mA. The feedback of the final control element

position comes from a resistance potentiometer to the analog input AI4.

The setting of the ratio factor range is described in chapter 3.4.5, page 75.

Drive

AI1

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 DO

L+ AO

123 456789101112

Setting the structure switches:

S1 = 3

S2 = 2

S4 = 2, 3

S5 = 2, 3

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4 Spark quench-

ing internal

Slot 3

Limit value

Option module

6DR2801-8D

M1 A1 R2 M2R1 A2

123 456

not

used

M/A S E

123 4

Option module

6DR2800-8R

L+Δy

13 14 15

--Δy

S7 = 0, 1

S19 = 4

S54 = 1

Please read the foreword in chapter 7.1, pg. 193 and the warnings in chapter 2.1 (from page 17)

SIPART DR21 standard controller

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

R=R

A+ΔR+R

Perform spark

quenching according

to EMC requirements!

+--

When using the analog inputs AI1 and AI2 the

feed voltage at the transmitter may be only 15 V

under worst case conditions.

123 4

GND GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 207

Configuration example Z1 Fixed setpoint control with PD two-position controller

The controlled variable comes from a thermocouple with internal refer-

ence point.

The controlled variable of the thermocouple is fed directly to the analog input

AI3. The type of thermocouple is selected with S9. The measuring range must

be set in the CAE menu (see chapter5.4.5, page 165).

System adaptation with the parameters Y1 and Y2.

Two-position controller structure see chapter 3.6, page 94

+y / --y

AI1

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 DO

L+ AO

123 456789101112

Setting the structure switches:

S2 = 1

S6 = 4 to 7

S8 = 1

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

Slot 3

Limit value

Option module

6DR2801-8D

M1 A1 R2 M2R1 A2

123 456

not

used

123 4

Option module

6DR2801-8V

L+Δy

13 14 15

--Δy

S15 = 3

S27 = 8

S54 = 3

Please note the possibilities of setting the operating point in the P-controller (page 93) and the foreword in

chapter 7.1, page 193

SIPART DR21 standard controller

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

123 4

Rcomp

Cooling Heating

-- +

ΣRL≤300 Ω

-- +IGND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

208 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Configuration example L1 Process display

Structured as a process display, the SIPART DR21 controller can display and

monitor the process variables. If the manipulated variable y and yR is structu-

red, it can be monitored to the y display and can be adjusted with the keys (7)

and (8) with the appropriate wiring. The controlled variable x can be shown in

the red analog display (1) with structuring as x2. If the limit value A1 to A4 if

referred to x with S76, S77, S80 and shown in the green bar display (2), the

relation of the variable to be monitored to the limit values can be seen at a

glance. With the parameters dA, dE (oFPA) the variables w, x, A1 to A4 can be

displayed in their right physical variable in the w/x display (3). The y display is

made in 0 to 100%. See also fig. 3-16, page 82

Drive

wi w

to the controller

from the

controller

AI1

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 DO

2L+ AO

123 456789101112

Setting the structure switches of the process display:

S1 = 4, process display

S2 = 2, S-controller internal

feedback

S15 = 0, x1 = 0

S16 = 3, x2 !AI3

S17 = 1, we !AI1

S19 = 2, yR !AI2

S80 = 6, Alarms A1 to A4 in the process operation

mode can be displayed and adjusted

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

Slot 3

Limit value

123 45

not

used

123 4

Option module

6DR2800-8J

L+Δy

13 14 15

--Δy

Please read the foreword to chapter 7.1, page 193

SIPART DR21 standard controller

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

123 4

S42 = 2, w: int $ext

S54 = 1, yR display

S56 = 2, w !AO

S57 = 1, ±Δy!DO1/2

S76 = 2, A1/A2

S77 = 2, A3/A4

referred

to x

--+

x2 +Δy--Δy

wEyR

not

used

GND R-- +

1) for further processing e.g. in another SIPART DR controller

--+

GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 209

Configuration example L1 process display (continued)

SIPART DR21

SIEMENS

SP-W

OUT-Y

ADAPT

100

Adjusting keys ±Δy

Adjustment of setpoint with rapid

action

Controlled

variable x

Adaptation LED: off

Shiftkey:w/xdisplay

Display CB signal

Internal LED: current status

Manual LED: current status

Shift key Manual/Tracking

Manual Ext/Tracking-LED

Analog display

Limit values

A1 to A4

w/x display

values A1 to A4

yR display

or time value

A1 to A4

Shift key setpoint int $ext

Limit value A1

exceeded

!flashes

20 Signal lamps for “limit value A1 to A4

activated”

Process operation mode -- control and display elements in the setting as a process display

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

210 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Configuration example L2 Manual control unit (HS)

Drive

Controller

Display/

manual control unit

The “Manual control unit” operating mode is implemented in the setting S1 = 4 (con-

trol unit/process display). The output of a K-controller (e.g. another SIPART DR21)

canberemotecontrolledwiththeHS.

The manual control unit has priority over the controller. In the HS manual operation

has priority over tracking, in the controller tracking over manual operation. The HS

is tracked if it is not in manual operation itself, i.e. if LED (13) H external lights and

LED (12) Manual is dark. The controller is always tracked when the HS is in manual

operation, i.e. if the LED (12) on the HS is alight. If LED (12) H flashes on the con-

troller, this means that manual operation is not possible from the controller because

trackin

rom the HS has

riorit

EDd

(

)

on the controller li

hts u

AI1

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 L+ AO

123 456789101112

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

Slot 3

Limit value

1234 5 6

not

used

1234

Option module

6DR2800-8J

L+Δy

13 14 15

--Δy

SIPART DR21 standard controller

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

12 3 4

not

used

R-- +

-- +

yN ly

Manual control unit

Setting the structure switches of the manual control unit:

S1 = 4, control unit S18 = 2, yN $AI2

S2 = 0, K-controller S23 = 0, CB = 0

S15 = 0, x1 = 0 S49 = 1

S16 = 1, x2 !AI1 S60 = 1, H !DO1

Please read the foreword to chapter 7.1, page 193

GND GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 211

Configuration example L2 Manual control unit (HS) (continued)

The process variables controlled variable and manipulated variable can be dis-

played online on the HS. The setpoint can only be simulated as a flag, i.e. it must

be transmitted manually by the controller. For this, CB must be = 0 (S23 = 0) on the

HS. See also chapter 3.4.6, page 80 and figure 3-18, page 87.

AI1

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 L+ AO

123 456789101112

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

Slot 3

Limit value

1234 5 6 1234

Option module

6DR2800-8J

L+Δy

13 14 15

--Δy

SIPART DR21 standard controller

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

12 3 4

not

used

R+

not

used

x1 ly

K-controller

Setting the structure switches of the K-controller:

S1 = 0, fixed setpoint controller

S2 = 0, K-controller

S15 = 4, X1 !AI4

S18 = 1, yN !AI1

S61 = 1, Nw !DO1

S72 = 1

GND GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

212 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Configuration example L3 control unit (LG) with slave controller (FR)

LG operates as a setpoint transmitter and manual control unit

with S-output.

With the LG the setpoint and the S-output of the slave controller can be remote con-

trolled. The FR has priority with respect to setpoint and manual operation. The set-

point of the FR can only be set with the LG when the LED (17) internal, LED (18)c

and LED (4) w display are alight. It is recommended to switch off the setpoint ramp

on the FR. Before switching over to setpoint presetting from the FR, you have to

wait for the setpoint set on the LG (max. 6 s).

Parallel to the FR, the process variables setpoint, controller variable and position

feedback can be displayed on the LG. x2 must be structured with S16 on the LG

for the analog x value display.

Drive

±Δy

F-controllerControl unit

±Δy

Please read the foreword to chapter 7.1, page 193

Control unit (LG)

Setting the structure switches of the control unit:

S1 = 4, control unit S30 = 2, --yBL !DI2

S2 = 0, S-controller i.Rf. S42 = 2, wi: int $ext

S15 = 0, x1 = 0 S49 = 1

S17 = 1, we !AI1 S54 = 1, yR display

S19 = 3, yR !AI3 S56 = 2, w !AO

S22 = 1, Opt. Position 3 S57=1,±Δy!DO1/2

S23 = 1, CB !DI1 S58 = 3, RB !DO3

S25 = 0, N = 0 S60 = 4, H !DO4

S26 = 0, Si = 0 S62 = 5, A1 !DO5

S29 = 2, +yBL !DI2 S63 = 6, A2 !DO6

AI1

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 L+ AO

123 456789101112

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

Slot 3

DI3 DO

DI4

1234 5 6

not

used

1234

Option module

6DR2800-8J

L+Δy

13 14 15

--Δy

SIPART DR21 standard controller

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

12 34

R-- +

Option module

6DR2801-8E

GND GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 213

Configuration example L3 Control unit (LG) with slave controller (FR)

(continued)

Tracking of the internal setpoint wi to the active setpoint (S45 = 0) and the latter wi

as a setpoint at CB failure (S44 = 0) must be set otherwise setpoint steps occur when

switching between LG and FR.

Manual control of the manipulated variable from the LG is only possible if the LED

(12) Manual on the LG lights up and the LED (13) H ext. is dark. Lighting of the LED

(13) indicates manual operation of the FR. If the LED (12) of the FR is alight, manual

operation is possible from there in any case. See also chapter 3.4.6, page 80 and

figure 3-18, page 87.

AI1

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 L+ AO

123456789101112

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

Slot 3

1234 5 6 1234

Option module

6DR2800-8J

L+Δy

13 14 15

--Δy

SIPART DR21 standard controller

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

12 3 4

R+

not

used

Option module

6DR2801-8E

DI4

A2 I

-- +

12 3

Coupling relay

6DR2804-8B

98 76 54

-- +

ESR

Slave controller (FR)

Setting the structure switches of the follow-up controller:

S1 = 1, follow-up controller

S2 = 2, S-controller i.Rf.

S15 = 3, x1 !AI3

S16 = 0, x2 !0

S17 = 1, we !AI1

S19 = 2, yR !AI2

S22 = 1, Opt. Position 3

S23 = 2, CB !DI2

S26 = 0, Si !0

S42 = 2, wi int $ext

S49 = 1

S54 = 1, yR display

S56 = 2, w !AO

S57 = 1, ±Δy!DO1/2

S58 = 3, RB !DO3

S60 = 4, H !DO4

S62 = 5, A1 !DO5

S63 = 6, A2 !DO6

GND GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

214 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Configuration example L4 control unit (LG) with slave controller (FR)

The control unit (SIPART DR21) operates as a setpoint trans-

mitter and manual control unit, the slave controller (FR) SIPART

DR22 as a K-controller

If the controller following the control unit is to operate as a K-controller, a SIPART

DR22 must be used. In the SIPART DR22 an additional analog output is available

for output of the setpoint and switching inputs for tracking the manipulated variable.

In this example the control unit is structured as a K-setpoint transmitter and as an

S-manual control unit. The controller has priority with respect to manual operation

and internal setpoint presetting. The setpoint can only be preset by the LG and ac-

cepted by the FR if both LEDs Int/Ext (17) and C (18) light up. In all other cases the

value preset by the FR is only displayed in the LG. Manual operation of the LG is only

possible when the Manual LED (12) lights steadily.

Drive

±Δy

F-controllerControl unit

wi wi

±Δy

yR yR

SIPART DR21 control unit

Setting the structure switches of the SIPART DR21

control unit:

S1 = 4, control unit S25 = 0, N !DI2

S2 = 2, S-controller i.Rf. S26 = 0, Si !0

S15 = 0, x1 !0 S42 = 2, wi int $ext

S17 = 1, we !AI1 S54 = 1, yR display

S19 = 3, yR !AI3 S56 = 2, w !AO

S22 = 1, Opt. Position 3 S57 = 1, ±Δy!DO1/2

S23 = 21, CB !DI1 S58 = 4, RB !DO4

S60 = 3, H !DO3

Control unit (LG)

AI1

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 L+ AO

123 456789101112

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

Slot 3

DI4DO

1234 5 6

not

used

1234

Option module

6DR2800-8J

L+Δy

13 14 15

--Δy

SIPART DR21 standard controller

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

12 34

R-- +

Option module

6DR2801-8E

Please read the foreword to chapter 7.1, page 193

GND GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.3 Configuration examples

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 215

Configuration example L4 continued

If the FR is switched to manual in this state, lighting of the LED (13) indicates tracking

mode, flashing of LED (12) the ineffectiveness of the positioning keys (7) and (8).

Tracking has priority over manual operation. Lighting of the LED (13) on the FR

indicates tracking i.e. manual control from the control unit (LG). If the FR is now

switched to manual, LED (13) flashes and the Manual LED lights steadily because

manual operation has priority over tracking on the FR. The manipulated variable of the

FR is controlled incrementally by the LG. Therefore the actuating time ty (onPA) must

be set to a finite value (ty > 20 s) otherwise the final value will be reached immediately

when the positioning keys (7) or (8) are pressed briefly. See also chapter 3.4.6, page

80 and figure 3-17, page 86.

Slave controller SIPART DR22

Setting the structure switches of the SIPART DR22 slave controller:

S1=3,slavecontroller S61=1,H>N

S16 = 0, FE2 !0S62=1,yN!yNΔ

S24 = 4, CB !DI4 S74 = 18, w !AO2

S25 = 0, He !0S78=4,H!DO4

S35 = 1, +Δy!DI1 S85 = 8, Int !DO8

S36 = 2, --Δy!DI2 S89 = 1, N !N

S49 = 2, wi int $ext

AI1

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

AI1

123 45678910111213 14 15

SIPART DR22 standard controller

6DR2210-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2210-4 (UC 24 C)

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

L+ AA1 AA2 AA3 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 AI2

AI2

AI3

ty > 20 s

-- +

--+

Drive

Trans-

mitter

GND GND DO

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.4 Configuring tool, forms

Manual

216 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

7.4 Configuring tool, forms

We recommend the following procedure for solving your controller problems:

- Determining the assembly of the controller

- If necessary: Determining the position of bridges and switches on the backplane module and

signal transformers

- Drawing the wiring diagram

- Enter settings further down in the onPA, ofPA and Stru list (structuring, parameterizing)

- The SIMATIC PDM program is available for PC-supported configurations.

For notes

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.4 Configuring tool, forms

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 217

Circuit design K/S-controller 6DR2100-4/-5

Slot 1

AI3

Slot 2

AI4

not

used

Slot 3

Limit value

Option module

6DR2801-8D

M1 A1 R2 M2R1 A2

123 456

not

used

AI1

SIPART DR21 standard controller

UC 24 C

AC 115 V

AC 230 V

6DR2100-5 (AC230 V/115 V)

6DR2100-4 (UC 24 C)

AI1

AI2

+DI1 DI2 DO

L+ AO

123 456789101112

-Δy

13 14 15

+Δy

123 4 123 4

Spark quench-

ing internal

GND GND

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.4 Configuring tool, forms

Manual

218 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Settings SIPART DR21, controller number / measuring point ..................

Parameter onPA

Digital indication on display Fac-

Dimen-

3 (w/x) for preset tory

sion

Parameter meaning 9(y)

Filter time constant xd (adaptive) tF 1.000 s

(

)

Derivative action gain vv 5.000 1

Proportional gain factor cP 0.100 1

Integral-action time tn 9984 s

Derivative-action time tv oFF s

Response threshold AH 0.0 %

Operating point YO Auto %

Output variable limiting start YA -- 5. 0 %

Output variable limit end (YA ≤YE) YE 105.0 %

(

)

y actuating time open/period heating tP 1.000 s

y actuating time open/period cooling tM 1.000 s

min. actuating pulse pause tA 200 ms

min. actuating pulse length tE 200 ms

Filter time constant AI1 t1 1.000 s

Filter time constant AI2 t2 1.000 s

Filter time constant AI3 t3 1.000 s

Filter time constant AI4 t4 1.000 s

Multiplicative constant c1 0.000 1

Multiplicative constant c2 0.000 1

Additive constant c3 0.000 100 %

Multiplicative constant c4 1.000 1

Additive constant c5 0.000 100 %

Multiplicative constant c6 0.0 1

Multiplicative constant c7 1.000 1

Display refresh rate dr 1.000 s

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.4 Configuring tool, forms

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 219

Settings SIPART DR21, controller number / measuring point ..................

Parameter oFPA

Digital indication on display Fac-

Dimen-

3 (w/x) for preset tory

sion

Parameter meaning 9(y)

Decimal point w/x display dP --

Startofscale dA 0.0 --

Full scale dE 100.0 --

Alarm 1 A1 5,0 --

Alarm 2 (A2 ≤A1) A2

--5 ,0 --

(

)

Alarm 3 A3

5,0 --

Alarm 4 (A4 ≤A3) A4

--5 ,0 --

(

)

Hysteresis alarms HA

1 %

Setpoint limit start SA --5, 0 --

Setpoint limit end SE

105,0 --

Safety setpoint SH

0,0 --

Setpoint ramp time tS oFF min

Ratio factor start vA 0,000 1

Ratio factor end vE

1,000 1

Safety output variable YS 0,0 %

Split range left y1 (y1 ≤y2) Y1

50,0 %

(

)

Split range right y2 Y2

50,0 %

Vertex value at --10 %

L--1

--1 0

Vertex value at 0 %

ertex va

ue at 10 %

ertex value at 30 %

Vertexvalueat 40%

Vertexvalueat 50% L5 50 %

Vertexvalueat 60%

ertex value at 70 %

ertex value at 90 %

Vertex value at 100 %

L10

100

Vertex value at 110 % L11 110 %

Decimal point Pd --

Startofscale Ad 0,0 --

Full scale (only at S1 = 3) Ed

100,0 --

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.4 Configuring tool, forms

Manual

220 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Settings SIPART DR21, controller number / measuring point ...................

Parameter CAE3

Parameter meaning Digital indication on displays

(

)

19 (w)

(

)

Sensor type SEnS

Temperature unit unit

Thermocouple type tc

Temperature reference point tb

Line resistance Mr

Decimal point measuring range MP

Range start MA

Range full scale ME

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.4 Configuring tool, forms

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 221

Settings SIPART DR21, controller number / measuring point ..................

Structure switches Stru

Switch

Preset Factory

number

setting

1 0

2 0

3 0

4 0

5 0

6 0

7 0

8 0

9 0

10 0

11 0

12 0

13 0

14 0

15 1

16 2

17 3

18 4

19 0

20 0

21 0

22 0

23 8

24 0

25 1

26 2

27 0

28 0

29 0

30 0

31 0

32 0

33 0

34 0

35 0

36 0

37 0

38 0

39 0

40 0

41 0

42 0

43 0

44 0

45 0

46 0

47 0

48 0

49 0

50 0

51 0

Switch Preset Factor

number

set.

52 0

53 0

54 0

55 0

56 0

57 0

58 0

59 0

60 0

61 0

62 1

63 2

64 0

65 0

66 0

67 0

68 0

69 0

70 0

71 0

72 0

73 0

74 0

75 0

76 0

77 0

78 0

79 0

80 0

81 0

82 0

83 0

84 0/1 1)

85 0/1 1)

86 0

87 0

88 0

89 0

90 0

91 0

92 02)

1) as of software version --A5

2) as of software version --B5

7 Application examples for configuring the controller

7.4 Configuring tool, forms

Manual

222 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

8 Maintenance

8.1 General information and handling

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 223

8 Maintenance

8.1 General information and handling

The controller is maintenance-free. White spirit or industrial alcohol is recommended for clean-

ing the front foil and the plastic housing if necessary.

be changed freely without readjustment with power supplied. The other modules may also be

replaced without readjustment (procedure as described in chapter 8.2).

CAUTION

All modules contain components which are vulnerable to static. Observe the

safety precautions!

S-actuators on S-controllers remain in their last position.

!WARNING

The backplane module may only be changed after the power supply has been

safely disconnected.

!WARNING

Modules may only be repaired in an authorized workshop. This applies particu-

larly to the backplane module because of the safety functions (safe disconnec-

tion and safety extra low voltages).

8 Maintenance

8.2 Exchanging components

Manual

224 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

8.2 Exchanging components

DReplacing the front module

- Pull out the mains plug

- Remove the backplane module and any options modules which may be plugged in.

- Carefully lever out the label cover with a screwdriver at the cutout at the top and snap the

cover out of the bottom hinge points by bending slightly.

- Loosen the fastening screw (captive) (see (2) fig. 8-1).

- Tilt the top of the front module at the head of the screw and pull it out angled slightly for-

wards.

- Install in reverse order. Make sure the sealing ring is positioned perfectly!

(1) Front module

(2) Fastening screw (shaft screw M3)

for the front module

(3) Tag plate cover

(2)

(1)

(3)

Figure 8-1 Front module with removed tag plate cover

8 Maintenance

8.2 Exchanging components

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 225

DReplacing the options modules

- Pull off the plug terminals.

- Release the lock and remove the options module (see (6) figure 8-2).

- Push in the new module to the stop and lock it (the modules are slot coded). Please

make sure the right modules are plugged into the slots provided for the different options

(see chapter 2.4, page 24).

- Plug in the terminal (pay attention to slot labeling!),

(1) Front module

(2) Plastic housing

(3) Module locked

(4) Dummy cover

(5) Terminals

(6) Module unlocked

(7) Fastening screw for the

backplane-module

(8) Terminal 4-pole

(9) Terminal 8-pole

(10) Terminal 3-pole

(6) (5) (3)

(4)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(1)

(2)

Figure 8-2 Controller rear view

DReplacement of the backplane module (power supply unit + basic circuit board)

- Pull out the mains plug!

- Pull off the plug terminals.

- Disconnect the PE conductor

- Loosen the fastening screw of the backplane module (see (2) fig. 8-2) and pull out the

module.

- Install in reverse order.

8 Maintenance

8.3 LED-test and software version

Manual

226 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

DDisconnect the power supply unit from the basic circuit board

(Components of the backplane module)

- Pull out the backplane module (see replacement of the backplane module)

- Pull out the ribbon cable plug (see (5) figue 8-3)

- Loosen the fastening screw of the basic circuit board (see (7) figure 8-3).

- Separate the basic circuit board and the power supply unit.

- Re-assemble in reverse order.

(Pay attention to correct plugging of jumpers (see (3) figure 8-3))

(1) Connecting plug

(2) Fastening screw for the

backplane module

(3) Plug--in jumpers

(4) Power supply unit

(5) Plug ribbon cable

(6) Basic circuit board

(7) Fastening screws for the

Basic circuit board

(7)

(6)

(5)

(4) (3) (2)

(1)

Figure 8-3 Backplane module

8.3 LED-test and software version

If the Shift key (6) is pressed for about 10 s (“PS” flashes on the manipulated variable display

after about 5 s), this leads to the LED-test. All LEDs light up, the displays show “8.8.8.8.” or

“88.” and a light marker covering 2 LEDs runs from 0 to 100% on both bargraphs (on reaching

100% it starts again at 0%).

If the Internal-/External key (16) is additionally pressed permanently during the lamp test, “dr21”

appears on the digital x/w-display and the controller software version on the digital y-display.

During the LED-test and display of the software version the controller continues to operate on-

line in its last operating mode.

8 Maintenance

8.4 Spare parts list

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 227

8.4 Spare parts list

Item Figure Description Comments Order number

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

(1) Figure 8-1

(2) Figure 8-1

(3) Figure 8-1

Front module

Front module complete

Shaft screw (M3)

Tag plate cover

10 Tag plate labels

C73451-A3004-B112

D7964-L9010-S3

C73451-A3001-C5

C73451-A3001-C16

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

(2) Figure 8-2

(4) Figure 8-2

Housing

Plastic housing

Dummy covers for unoccupied slots

Clamps

10 self--adhesive sealing rings

(Front frame/panel)

C73451-A3004-C3

C73451-A3000-C11

C73451-A3000-B20

C73451-A3000-C41

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

(4) Figure 8-3

”

(6) Figure 8-3

(8) Figure 8-2

(9) Figure 8-2

(10) Figure 8-2

Backplane module

Power supply unit -- 24 V UC

-- 115/230 V AC

Basic circuit board: S-/K-controller

Terminal: -- 4-pole

-- 8-pole

-- 3-pole

Mains plug:

-- 3-pin plug for

115/230 V AC IEC--230/V, DIN 49457A

-- Special 2-pin plug for 24 V UC

without mains plug C73451-A3004-B8

C73451-A3004-B5

C73451-A3004-L105

W73078-B1003-A904

W73078-B1017-A908

W73078-B1018-A903

C73334-Z343-C3

C73334-Z343-C6

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

Options

Terminals:

-- 4-pin for 6DR2800-8J/8R

-- 4-pin for 6DR2800-8V

-- 5-pin for 6DR2801-8C

-- 6-pin for 6DR2801-8D/8E

see chapter 8.5,

Ordering data

W73078-B1001-A904

W73078-B1003-A904

W73078-B1001-A705

W73078-B1001-A906

DOrdering information

The order must contain:

- Quantity

- Order number

- Description

We recommend you to specify the controller order number to be on the safe side.

DOrdering example

2 units W73078-B1003-A904

Terminal 4-pin backplane module DR21

8 Maintenance

8.5 Ordering data

Manual

228 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

8.5 Ordering data

SIPART DR21 process controller 72 x 144

S-/K-controller for

-- Power supply UC 24 V 6DR2100-4...............................................

-- Power supply AC 230 V, can be switched to AC 115 V 6DR2100-5....................

Options/accessories

Signal converter/analog signals

-- for current input 0/4 to 20 mA or 0/0.2 to 1 V or 0/2 to

10 V (U/I-module) 6DR2800-8J...................................................

-- for resistance potentiometer (R-module) 6DR2800-8R..............................

-- for TC/RTD/R/MV-signals, programmable (UNI-module) 6DR2800-8V.................

-- Reference point terminal for TC, internal 6DR2805-8A..............................

-- Measuring range plug for I = 20 mA and U = 10 V 6DR2805-8J.......................

Signal converter/switching signals

-- with 5 digital inputs (5DI-module) 6DR2801-8C....................................

-- with 2 relay outputs (35 V) (2 DO-relay-module) 6DR2801-8D........................

-- with 4 digital outputs and 2 digital inputs (2DI 4DO-module) 6DR2801-8E.............

Interface for serial communication RS 232/RS 485 6DR2803-8C...........................

Interface for PROFIBUS DP RS 232/RS 485 6DR2803-8P................................

Coupling relay module for mounting on a DIN rail on the back of the controller

-- with 4 relays (AC 250 V) 6DR2804-8A............................................

-- with 2 relays (AC 250 V) 6DR2804-8B............................................

Assembly- and installation guide

-- German/English C73000-M7474-C35.............................................

-- French/Spanish/Italian C73000-M7450-C35........................................

Quick Reference

-- German/English C73000-B7474-C141............................................

-- French/Spanish/Italian C73000-B7450-C141.......................................

Manual

-- German C73000-B7400-C143...................................................

-- English C73000-B7476-C143....................................................

SIPART DR21 Serial SIPART DR210x bus interface / Operating Manual

can be downloaded from the INTERNET. Internet address: www.fielddevices.com (version

05/2000)

9 General explanation of abbreviations for SIPART DRManual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 229

9 General explanation of abbreviations for SIPART DR

Acontrol signal no automatic mode.................

A* Parameter Alarms (limit values)................

Ad.................

AdAP Parameterization mode Adaptation.............

AdAPT LED, adaptation mode............

AH* Response threshold (dead zone)..............

AI* Analog inputs...............

AI*A Outputs of the analog inputs..............

AO Analog output...............

APSt Structuring mode All Preset (whole controller to factory setting).............

AUto automatic..............

Ar* Function block, Arithmetic...............

bLb Control signal, Blocking, Operating...............

bLPS Control signal, Blocking, Parameterization/Structuring.............

bLPSDI Control signal, Blocking, Parameterization/Structuring via digital input............

bLPSES Control signal, Blocking, Parameterization/Structuring via SES...........

bLS Control signal, Blocking, Structuring..............

bLSDI Control signal, Blocking, Structuring via digital input.............

bLSES Control signal, Blocking, Structuring via SES............

c* Parameter, Constants................

CLED, no computer standby.................

CA Calibration, start of range...............

CAE3 Parameterization mode, UNI-module.............

CB Control signal, Computer operation...............

CBDI Control signal, Computer operation via digital inputs..............

CBES Control signal, Computer operation via SES.............

cP (Kp) Proportional action factor................

CPU central processing unit..............

Cr Calibration, adjustment of line resistances (RL)................

dA Parameter, display range, start................

DDC direct digital control..............

dE Parameter, display range, end................

DI** Digital inputs..............

DO** Digital outputs.............

dP Parameter, display decimal point................

dPv Parameter direction of step command...............

dr Parameter, display refresh rate................

dY Parameter amplitude of the step command................

Ed.................

End Error message end..............

9 General explanation of abbreviations for SIPART DR Manual

230 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Err Error...............

FAST Error message for adaptation, system too fast.............

HA Parameter, hysteresis alarms...............

H Control signal manual mode.................

Hi Control signal manual internal................

HeDI Control signal manual external via digital input..............

HeES Control signal manual external via SES.............

HE Error message manual external...............

HOLD Programm controller, comparison with end of interval with hold function............

Int Control signal internal................

Iy Analog output, current manipulated variable................

Kp Proportional gain factor................

LED light emitting diode..............

L1 to L11 Parameter vertex points linearizer..........

MA* Start of measuring range..............

ME* Range full scale..............

MEM Memory.............

ModE Operating mode.............

MP* Parameter measuring decimal point..............

Mr* Parameter measuring of (RL) line resistances...............

MUF Signal transmitter fault message..............

n.ddc Error message tracking or DDC.............

n.End Error message full scale value not reached.............

no no................

no C Parameter setting (PC) nor calibrated..............

no.dY Error message, y-Step not correct.............

not none...............

nPoS not positioned.............

N Control signal tracking.................

NDI Control signal tracking via digital input...............

NES Control signal tracking via SES..............

Nw Control signal tracking effective...............

oFL overflow, positive overflow...............

-oFL -overflow, negative overflow..............

onPA Parameterization mode, on-line-parameterization.............

oFPA Structuring mode, offline-parameterization.............

OP** Error message option (slot)..............

OUT Output, output variable y..............

ovEr Shot Error message overshoot.........

9 General explanation of abbreviations for SIPART DRManual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 231

P Control signal-P-operation.................

PDI Control signal P-operation via digital input...................

PES Control signal P-operation via SES...................

PASS Error message step response in wrong direction.............

PAU Control signal parameter switching..............

PAUDI Control signal parameter switching via digital input............

PAUES Control signal parameter switching via SES............

PC Parameter Preset Calibration...............

P.oFL Error message x above the span.............

PV Process variable...............

RB Control signal, no computer standby...............

RC Control signal, no computer operation...............

S Structure switch.................

SA Parameter setpoint limiting start...............

Sb Parameter limiting setpoint................

SE Parameter setpoint limiting end...............

SES Serial interface..............

SG Parameter controlling variable...............

SH Parameter safety setpoint...............

Si Control signal safety operation, error message safety operation................

SiDI Control signal safety operation via digital input...............

SiES Control signal safety operation via SES..............

SMAL Error message small.............

SP Setpoint...............

SPC Setpoint control, setpoint via external system..............

StAt Error message, stationary, static..............

StrS Structuring mode, structure switch..............

StrU Parameterization preselection level select structuring..............

t* Filter time AI*.................

tA Parameter minimum turn-off duration................

tb Parameter reference temperature................

tE Parameter minimum turn-on duration................

tESt Self-test..............

tF* Parameter filter time constant...............

tM Parameter y-actuating time closed/cooling time................

tn Parameter integral action time................

tp Parameter y-actuating time open/heating................

tS Parameter setpoint ramp................

tSH Parameter setpoint ramp “HALT”...............

to to................

tU Monitoring time................

tv Parameter derivative action time................

tY Parameter actuating time................

9 General explanation of abbreviations for SIPART DR Manual

232 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

v Setpoint ratio factor.................

vact Actual ratio factor...............

vA Parameter ratio factor range start................

vE Parameter ratio factor range end................

vv Derivative action gain................

vvc Derivative action gain uncontrolled...............

w Setpoint w.................

wEExternal setpoint................

wEA External setpoint via analog input..............

wES External setpoint via SES..............

wEΔExternal setpoint incremental..............

wi Internal setpoint................

wv Standardized nominal ratio factor................

x Controlled variable x (actual value).................

x* Auxiliary controlled variables, partial controlled variables................

xd* Control difference...............

xds Control difference, position controller...............

xv Standardized actual ratio factor................

xw Control error (--xd)................

y Output variable.................

y1 Partial output variables in split range................

y2 Partial output variables in split range................

Y1 Parameter output variable range 1 in split range................

Y2 Parameter output variable range 2 in split range................

YA Parameter output variable limit start...............

YE Parameter output variable limit end...............

yEExternal output variable................

YES Reset parameter setting (PC) Calibration..............

yES External output variable via SES...............

yEΔExternal output variable incremental...............

yHManual output variable................

yNExternal output variable (tracking output variable)................

ySSafety output variable................

YS Parameter safety output variable...............

Yo Parameter operating point................

YBL Error message blocking mode..............

y.oFL Error message y outside the setpoint limits.............

yBL Control signal direction--dependent y-Blocking.............

yBLDI Control signal direction--dependent y-Blocking via digital inputs...........

yBLES Control signal direction--dependent y-Blocking via SES..........

Δw Control signal incremental w-Adjustment.............

ΔwDI Control signal incremental w-Adjustment by digital inputs............

9 General explanation of abbreviations for SIPART DRManual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08 233

ΔwES Control signal incremental w-Adjustment by SES...........

Δy Control signal incremental y-Adjustment..............

ΔyDI Control signal incremental y-Adjustment by digital inputs............

ΔyES Control signal incremental y-Adjustment by SES............

z Disturbance variable.................

-1.1 to 11.1 Parameter vertex points linearizer FE1........

-1.3 to 11.3 Parameter vertex points linearizer FE3........

Controller.........

Internal.........

Manual (internal manipulated variable preset).........

External (tracking).........

Exit.........

Enter.........

Fault.........

Error message Fault analog inputs.........

Identification decimal point.........

AI**

↗adjustable................

**.o old parameters...............

**.n new parameters...............

*stands for counter number or parameter name.................

9 General explanation of abbreviations for SIPART DR Manual

234 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-08

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-07 235

Index

Numbers

6DR210x--4, Connection, 130

6DR210x--5, Connection, 130

6DR2800--8J

Connection, 133

Connection example, 137

Function principle of the option module, 28

Technical Data, 40

6DR2800--8R

Connection, 134

Function principle of the option modules, 28

Technical Data, 40

6DR2800--8V

Connection, 135

Function principle of the option modules, 29

Technical Data, 41

6DR2801--8C, 142

Function principle of the option modules, 31

Technical Data, 43

6DR2801--8D, 143

Function principle of the option modules, 30

Technical Data, 42

6DR2801--8E, 142

Function principle of the option modules, 30

Technical Data, 43

6DR2803--8C, 144

Function principle of the option modules, 32

Technical Data, 44

6DR2803--8P, 146

Connection, 147

Function principle of the option modules, 31

Technical Data, 43

6DR2804--8A, 143

6DR2804--8A/B, Technical Data, 45

6DR2804--8B, 143

6DR2805--8A, Function principle of the option

modules, 29

6DR2805--8J, 135

Function principle of the option modules, 30

Technical Data, 42

A/D converter, Technical Data, 38

A1 to A4, Digital outputs, Features, 22

Actual value, 150

Actual value display, Functional explanation,

Actuating time tp and tM, 94

AdAP, 186

Configuration mode, 156

Parameter list, 161

Adaptation, 113

Aborted, 157

Condition, 157

Error messages, 162

Adaptive filter, 115, 185

Alarm LED, 151

Amplitude of the step command, 186

Analog input, Universal module, 135

Analog inputs

Features, 19

Functional principle of the standard control-

ler, 26

Technical Data, 36

Analog output signal processing (S56), 110

Analog outputs, Technical Data, 37

AO, Connection, 131

Application examples, 193

APSt, 178

Configuring, 27

Automatic mode, Controller output structure,

107

Backplane module

Removal, 121

Replacing, 225

Backplane module with power supply unit, De-

sign, 24

bLb

Digital outputs, Features, 21

Functional explanation, 54

Operating locks, 149

Manual

236 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-07

Block diagram, 129

bLPS

Digital outputs, Features, 21

Functional explanation, 54

Operating locks, 149

bLS

Digital outputs, Features, 21

Functional explanation, 54

bLS, Operating locks, 149

CAE3, Set UNI--module, 173

Cascade controls, 63

Digital outputs, Features, 21

Functional explanation, 54

Changing the scales, 123

Changing the tag plate, 123

Commissioning, 181

Configuration examples, 199

Configuration mode, 149, 154

AdAP (adaptation), 156

oFPA (offline parameters), 163

onPA (online parameters), 155

StrS (structure switch), 165

Configuring, Functional principle of the stan-

dard controller, 27

Configuring the controller, Application exam-

ples, 193

Configuring tool, 216

for structuring, 221

to oFPA, 219

to onPA, 218

Connecting elements, Arrangement, 126

Connection

6DR210x--4, 130

6DR210x--5, 130

6DR2800--8J, 133

6DR2800--8R, 134

6DR2800--8V, 135

AO, 131

Options modules, 133

DI1toDI2,131

DO1toDO2,132

Electrical, 126

Examples, 137

Ground, 128

Interface module, 144

Measuring lines, 127, 130

PE conductor, 126

Power Supply, 126, 130

PROFIBUS--DP, 147

RS 232, 144

Signal lines, 127, 130

Standard controller, 130

Connection technique, Design, 25

Constants c1 to c7, Functional explanation, 57

Control algorithm, 91

Control parameters

automatic setting, 186

Setting by the adaptation method, 189

Control signals

for setpoint switching, 63

Functional explanation, 54, 57

Display range, Functional explanation, 58

Control system coupling, 89, 90

via serial interface, 109

Control unit, 80, 83

DDC fixed setpoint controller, 69

Controlled ratio controller, 75

Controlled system with compensation, Trans-

ient function, 191

Controlled variable processing, 64

Controller, installing, 124

Controller design, Adaptation, 114

Controller direction of control action, Adapta-

tion to controlled system, 181

Controller direction of effect, 91

Controller output structure

S2=0, 94

S2=1, 95

S2=2, 99

S2=3, 102

Controller output structures, 94

Controller types, 55

Controls

SPC, 63

Cascade, 63

Synchronized, 63

Coupling relay, Technical Data, 45

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-07 237

CPU

Functional principle of the standard control-

ler, 26

self--diagnostics, 179

DDC fixed setpoint controller, 68

Control unit, 69

Design, 24

DI1 to DI2, Connection, 131

Digital inputs

Assignment and direction of effect, 50

Features, 21, 22

Functional principle of the standard control-

ler, 26

Linking with the control signals, 50

Technical Data, 37

Digital output signal processing (S57 to S75),

111

Digital outputs

Features

A1 to A4, 22

bLb, 21

bLPS, 21

bLS, 21

CB, 21

H, 22

He, 21

MUF, 22

N, 21

Nw, 22

P, 21

RB, 22

RC, 22

Si, 21

tS, 21

tSH, 21

w, 22

y, 22

yBL, 21

Functional principle of the standard control-

ler, 26

Technical Data, 38

Direction of control action, 181

of actuator, 181

of system, 181

Direction of effect

actuator, 182

system, 182

Direction--dependent blocking operation, 108

Display, software version, 151

Display levels, 73

Display technique, Technical Data, 39

DO1 to DO2, Connection, 132

dy -- amplitude of the step command, Preset-

ting, 186

Error messages, Adaptation, 162

Explanation of abbreviations, 229

external setpoint wE, 64

Factory setting, 178

Behavior of the controller, 150

Features, 19

Filter, Setting, 185

Fixed setpoint controller

DDC, 68

with 2 independent setpoints, 59

with one setpoint (control system coupling),

Front module

Design, 24

Replacing, 224

Function principle, 26

Functional description

Controller types, 55

Structure switches, 47

Functional explanation, of the digital message

signals, 111

Fundamental control technology terms, 9

Actuators, 9

Controller output signal, 12

Continuous controller, 13

Control loop, 9

control response, 10

Three--position step controller with internal

feedback, 12

Final control elements, 9

P controller, 10

PD controller, 11

PI controller, 11

PID controller, 11

Manual

238 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-07

Sensor, 9

Step function, 10

transmitter, 9

Two--position controller, 14

H, Digital outputs, Features, 22

Digital outputs, Features, 21

Functional explanation, 54

I/U module, Function principle of the option

modules, 28

Installation, 121

Selecting the Installation Site, 121

Internet address:, 31

K controller

Direction of effect, 181

Setting the floating time, 183

Kp, 187

Lamp test, 151

Limit value alarms, 117

Line capacitance, Technical Data, 44

Linearizer, 118

Maintenance, 223

Manipulated variable, 150

Manipulated variable adjustment, Technical

Data, 38

Manipulated variable limit, 93

Manual control station, 85

Manual mode, 107

absolute ~, 154

Measuring inputs, Modules, 133

Measuring range

I, 175

mV, 175

Pt100, 176

Resistance potentiometer, 177

Thermocouples, 175

U, 175

Measuring range plug

Function principle of the option modules, 30

Pin assignment, 135

Technical Data, 42

Measuring transmitter feed, Technical Data, 38

Mechanical Installation, 121

Modules

for analog measuring inputs, 133

for expanding the digital inputs, 142

for expanding the digital outputs, 142

Monitoring time tU, Presetting, 186

MUF, Digital outputs, Features, 22

mV transmitter, Pin assignment, 135

Digital outputs, Features, 21

Functional explanation, 54

Tracking N, Functional explanation, 56

Nw, Digital outputs, Features, 22

Offline mode, 154

Parameter list, 164

oFPA

Configuration mode, 163

Configuring, 27

Configuring tool, 219

Online mode, 154

Parameter list, 155

onPA

Configuration mode, 155

Configuring, 27

Configuring tool, 218

Operating locks, 149

bLb, 149

bLPS, 149

bLS, 149

Operating point

automatic, 93

fixed, 93

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-07 239

y0 in P--controller, 93

Operation, 149

Operation mode

Configuration mode, 149

Process operation mode, 149

Selection level, 149

Operation with 2 or 3 setpoints, 64

Option module, Function principle, 28

Options modules

Connection, 133

Installation, 125

Replacing, 225

Ordering data, 228

Output signal processing

analog, 110

digital, 111

Output structure, Features, 19

Outputs for the manipulated variable Y, Func-

tional principle of the standard controller, 26

Digital outputs, Features, 21

Functional explanation, 54

P--controller, 91

Setting, 189

Parameter list

AdAP, 161

oFPA (offline parameters), 164

onPA (online parameters), 155

parameters, Technical Data, 39

PD--controller, Setting, 189

PI--controller, 91

PI--controller, Setting, 190

PID controller, Setting, 190

Pin assignment

Measuring range plug, 135

mV transmitter, 135

Pt100 sensor, 136

Resistance potentiometer, 137

Thermocouples, 136

Power Supply, Standard controller, 36

Power supply unit

Features, 20

Functional principle of the standard control-

ler, 27

Presetting

Amplitude of the step command dy, 186

Direction of step command Pv, 186

Monitoring time tU, 186

Process display, 80

Process operation mode, 149, 150

PROFIBUS DP, 120

Technical Data, 43

PROFIBUS--DP, 146

Connection, 147

Structure switches, 173

PT100, Measuring range, 176

Pt100 sensor, Pin assignment, 136

Pv -- Direction of step command, Presetting,

186

R, 137

R module, Function principle of the option mo-

dules, 28

Range of Application, 18

Ratio controller

controlled, 75

Example, 78

RB, Digital outputs, Features, 22

RC, Digital outputs, Features, 22

Rear of controller, 121

reference point, Function principle of the option

modules, 29

Relay contacts, unlock, 122

Replacing

Backplane module, 225

Front module, 224

Options modules, 225

Resistance potentiometer

Measuring range, 177

Pin assignment, 137

Resistor input, 134

Response threshold, Setting, 185

Response threshold AH, 116

Restart conditions, 120

Manual

240 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-07

RS 485, 145

RTD, 136

S controller

Adaptation to the actuating drive, 183

Direction of effect, 182

S--output, Technical Data, 37

S2=0, Controller output structure, 94

S2=1, Controller output structure, 95

S2=2, Controller output structure, 99

S2=3, Controller output structure, 102

SA, Functional explanation, 56

Safety notes, 17

Safety operation, 107

Scope of delivery, 17

SE, Functional explanation, 56

Selecting the control behavior, 186

Selection level, 149

Selection mode, 152

Serial interface, 120

Control system coupling, 109

Features, 22

PROFIBUS--DP, Function principle of the

option modules, 31

RS 232/RS 485, Function principle of the

option modules, 32

Technical Data, 44

Setpoint, 150

Setpoint change tSH, Functional explanation,

Setpoint display, Functional explanation, 58

Setpoint limits SA and SE, Functional explana-

tion, 56

Setpoint potentiometer, 83

Setpoint ramp tS

Functional description, 55

Functional explanation, 54

Setpoints, 195

Setting

P--controller, 189

PD--controller, 189

PI--controller, 190

PID controller, 190

the control parameters automatically, 186

the control parameters manually, 189, 191

Digital outputs, Features, 21

Functional explanation, 54

Slave controller, 62

without Int/Ext switching, 90

software version, Display, 151

Spare parts list, 227

SPC controls, 63

SPC--controller, 62

Standard controller

Connection, 130

Design, 24

Function principle, 26

Other functions, 115

Power Supply, 36

Start parameters, 161

Step command, Presetting, 186

StrS

Configuration mode, 165

Configuring, 27

Structure switches, 166

Stru, Configuring tool, 221

Structure switch list, 166

Structure switches

Analog input signal processing, 47

Configuring tool, 221

Digital input signal processing, 50

Functional description, 47

Switching

P--PI, 94

to automatic mode, 94

Switching over to manual operation, 47, 108

Synchronized controller, 62

Synchronized controls, 63

System identification, Adaptation, 113

TC, 136

Technical Data, 34

Technical Description, 17

Thermocouples

Measuring range, 175

Pin assignment, 136

Tracking operation, 107

Manual

SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-07 241

Transient function, of a controlled system with

compensation, 191

Transmitter fault, Switching over to manual

operation, 47, 108

Digital outputs, Features, 21

Functional description, 55

Functional explanation, 54

tSH

Digital outputs, Features, 21

Functional explanation, 54

tU (monitoring time), Presetting, 186

UNI module:

Function principle of the option modules, 29

Technical Data, 41

Universal module for analog input, 135

Voltage output, Features, 20

w, Digital outputs, Features, 22

wE, 64

Functional description, 55

Manual setpoint setting, 55

Work prior to installation, 121

Working with different setpoints, 195

wvi, Nominal ratio setting, 55

x--tracking (S43), Functional explanation, 56

y, Digital outputs, Features, 22

y display, 59, 98

Source and direction of effect, 108

yBL

Digital outputs, Features, 21

Functional explanation, 54

zD, 91

zy, 91

Manual

242 SIPART DR21

C73000-B7476-C143-07